JP2018082839A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving a performance effect of an emission performance.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine capable of executing a game includes: a movable body provided movably; and a light guide part for forming a predetermined light guide pattern overlapping with at least one portion of a movement area of the movable body on a player's side in a depth direction. The Pachinko game machine can execute an emission performance for allowing the predetermined light guide pattern of the light guide part to emit light for at least a part of the movement period of the movable body.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 23

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing games.

  In a pachinko gaming machine or slot machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, for example, a light-transmitting light guide plate and an end face of the light guide plate are separated from a display device that displays a variation display of symbols and an effect image related to a game. And a light emitting body capable of entering light, and a display device that emits a pattern made of unevenness formed on the front surface or the rear surface of the light guide plate by the light incident inside the light guide plate.

  In addition, in a gaming machine including this type of display device, there is one in which a movable body is movably provided on the back side of the light guide plate so as not to contact the light guide plate (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-150171

  The gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1 has a problem that the effect of the effect using the movable body is insufficient because the movable body is not related to the light emission effect that causes the light guide plate to emit light.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the effect of the light emission effect.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present application is:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) that performs variable display (for example, variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the production symbol) and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player 1) movable bodies (for example, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402) provided so as to be movable, and movement areas (for example, the movement area E1 and the movement area E2) of the movable bodies. A predetermined light guide pattern (for example, a light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits the light from the front surface) overlapping with at least a part of the player in the depth direction And a specific display means (for example, an active display unit) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, active display) corresponding to the variable display being executed. 8d) and the display mode of the specific display is lower than the first mode (for example, the second display mode (green) or the third display mode (red)) and the expectation level controlled to the advantageous state is lower than that of the first mode. A change effect execution means (for example, an active display change effect) that can be changed to any one of a plurality of display modes including the second mode (for example, the first display mode (blue)) (for example, The portion in which the production control microcomputer 115 executes steps S8006 and S8105), the first timing during variable display (for example, the first timing after the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 70 and before the start of super reach), and the first timing. This suggests that the display mode of the specific display changes at a later second timing (for example, the second timing after the start of super reach shown in FIG. 70 and before the fluctuation stop). At the second timing, the display mode of the specific display changes to the second mode at the second timing when the suggestion mode execution means (for example, the stage where the performance control microcomputer 115 executes step S8006 or S8105) capable of executing the suggestion stage. Suggestion effect restricting means for restricting execution of the suggestion effect suggesting that (for example, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), the true suggestion suggesting that the first display mode (blue) is changed at the second timing. As shown in FIG. 72 (A), the change pattern 2-1 is changed to the first display mode (blue) at the second timing while not changing to the change pattern 2-3 in which the effect is executed. For example, and the movement period of the movable body (for example, Ta2 at the start of the advancement operation to Ta at the end of the advancement operation) (E.g., the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402) can be executed in at least a part of the period up to 3 to emit the predetermined light guide pattern of the light guide section. It is possible to execute a light emission effect in which the predetermined light guide pattern of the light guide plate 501 emits light during at least a part of the moving period. FIG. 23 (A), FIG. 27, and FIG. 28).

  According to such a configuration, since the movement of the movable body becomes difficult to visually recognize when the light emission effect is executed, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(2) The gaming machine of (1),
The light emission effect is executed from the start to the end of the movement of the movable bodies (for example, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402) (for example, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body). The light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 is executed from before the start of the movement of 402 to after the end of the movement of 402. (See FIG. 23A and FIGS. 26 to 29).

  According to such a configuration, the movement of the movable body is finished when the light emission effect is finished, and the movement of the movable body becomes more difficult to visually recognize, so that the production effect can be improved.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
A mode determining means for determining the light emission mode of the light emission effect from among a plurality of types (for example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the light guide plate 501 to emit the light emission mode of the light emission effect in white pattern). And a red pattern for causing the light guide plate 501 to emit red light and a flash pattern for causing the light guide plate 501 to flash and emit light (see FIG. 22), and an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state) Advantageous state control means (for example, the CPU 103, when starting the variable display of the special figure game, based on the random value stored when the start winning occurs, the jackpot display result as the display result of the variable display Is executed (lottery) to determine whether or not to display and display a big hit game if the variable display result is "big hit" The jackpot opening pre-processing, the jackpot opening middle processing, the jackpot opening post-processing, the jackpot opening post-processing, and the jackpot end processing are performed.) The mode determination means is controlled by the advantageous state control means. The light emission mode is determined according to whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines the light emission mode according to whether or not the CPU 103 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), In the light emission effect, light is emitted in the light emission mode determined by the mode determining means (for example, in the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501, light is emitted in the light emission mode determined by the effect control CPU 120. See FIG. 22). .

  According to such a configuration, since the player can be expected according to the type of the light emission mode, the interest can be improved.

(4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
The gaming machine includes display means (for example, an effect display device 5), and the movable body has light emitting units (for example, movable body LEDs 307L and 307R, movable body LEDs 407A to 407D), and executes the light emission effect. The display means and the light emitting portion of the movable body are turned off (for example, when the light emitting effect of the light guide plate 501 is executed, each movable body LED 307L of the effect display device 5, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R, and the second movable body 402). , 307R and the movable body LEDs 407A to 407D are turned off (see FIGS. 26 to 28).

  According to such a configuration, the visibility of movement of the movable body can be further reduced while enhancing the effect of the light emission effect.

(5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4),
The movable body (for example, the second movable body 402) is a part for moving the movable body, and at least a part of the movable mechanism is visible from the player when the movable body is moving. (For example, the mechanism portion E), and the predetermined light guide pattern is disposed in front of the moving region of the moving mechanism unit in the movable body (for example, the predetermined light guide pattern is the second movable body 402). It may be arranged in front of the moving area of the mechanism part E in FIG.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the moving mechanism portion of the movable body due to the light emission effect.

(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),
The movable body has a light emitting portion (for example, movable body LEDs 307L and 307R, movable body LEDs 407A to 407D), and the light guide portion has a formation region (for example, a light emitting region 506) for forming the predetermined light guide pattern. A non-formation region that does not form the predetermined light guide pattern (for example, non-light-emitting portions 507A to 507E / non-light-emitting portions 507F in the non-light-emitting region 507), and the light-emitting portions are arranged to correspond to the non-formation regions. The movable body can be operated in the arranged state to perform a light emission effect by the light emitting unit and the light guide unit (for example, each of the movable body LEDs 307L and 307R and each movable unit corresponding to the non-light emitting units 507A to 507E). The first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are operated in a state in which the body LEDs 407A to 407D are arranged, and each movable body LED 307L is operated. 307R and is capable of executing emission effect by the movable member LED407A~407D and the light guide plate 501. See FIG. 29), it may be.

  According to such a configuration, not only the light guide portion emits light in the formation region, but also the non-formation region can emit light in the light emitting portion of the movable body. it can.

  Moreover, the invention which concerns on (7)-(12) shown below is contained in the form for implementing invention mentioned later. As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result in the variable display device, the game state (game There is a machine configured to give a predetermined game value to a player by changing the state of the machine (specifically, the state where the gaming machine is controlled) (so-called pachinko machine). In addition, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player starts variable display of identification information by the variable display device by operating the start lever, and the player By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time determined in advance from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is displayed. In accordance with the display result derived when the game is stopped, a winning occurs, a predetermined game medium determined in advance according to the winning is paid out, and when a specific winning occurs, a player is given a predetermined gaming value as a gaming state. There is one that is configured to be in a state to be given to (so-called slot machine). The game value is the right that the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for a player who is easy to win, and the right for becoming advantageous for a player. In other words, or a condition for winning a prize ball is easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of special symbols (identification information) that is started in the variable display device based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. If this happens, a “big hit” will occur. The derived display is to finally stop and display a symbol (final stop symbol). When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times of opening the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round. A game in a round may be referred to as a round game. In the variable display device, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol in the left, middle, and right symbols) continue for a predetermined period of time and stop and shake in a state that matches the specific display result. It can be a big hit before the final result is displayed because it is moving, scaling, or deforming, or multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the displayed symbol is switched. An effect performed in a state where the sex is continued (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes “out of” and the variability display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In such a gaming machine, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-208082 displays a specific display corresponding to variable display (for example, the hold icon), and suggests that the display mode of the specific display changes. It describes that the display mode of the specific display is changed after the performance is performed. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-208082, the display mode of the specific display after the change (that is, the reliability with respect to the big hit) is suggested by the mode of the suggested performance. Depending on the situation, it is suggested that there is a low possibility of being a big hit, and there is a possibility that the interest of the game may be reduced. Then, the invention which concerns on (7)-(12) aims at providing the gaming machine which can prevent that the interest of a game will fall.

(7) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6),
After the variable display is started, the specific effect execution means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 115 performs step S8006) capable of executing the specific effect (in this example, super reach) for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. The second timing comes in the period during which the specific performance is being executed (in this example, the second timing after the start of super reach shown in FIG. 70 and before the stop of fluctuation). It may be.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the specific performance.

(8) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7),
The suggestion effect execution means has a display mode (for example, the second display mode (green) or the third display mode (for example) in which the display mode of the specific display is controlled to be more advantageous than the second mode at the second timing. You may be made to be able to perform the suggestion effect which suggests changing to red)).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the suggestion effect executed at the second timing.

(9) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8),
The suggestion effect execution means includes a plurality of effect modes having different degrees of expectation (for example, an expectation level in which a display mode of active display after the effect changes (that is, a true suggestion effect), an expectation level that is a big hit, and the like are different. The suggestion effect of the mode and the second mode can be executed (see FIG. 72D).

  According to such a structure, the interest of a game can be improved.

(10) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9),
The suggestion effect executing means includes a first suggestion effect (for example, a true suggestion effect) in which the display mode of the specific display changes after the effect, and a second suggestion effect (for example, a false suggestion effect) in which the display mode of the specific display does not change after the effect. The second timing has a higher ratio of executing the first suggestion effect than the first timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 72C, the second timing is higher than the second timing). The ratio of executing the false suggestion effect is higher at the first timing (that is, the rate of executing the true suggestion effect is higher at the second timing than the first timing).

  According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the suggestion effect executed at the second timing.

(11) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10),
The suggestion effect execution means executes the suggestion effect according to an aspect in which at least a part is common regardless of which display aspect is changed from among the plurality of display aspects (for example, which active display is When suggesting whether to change the display mode, it may be executed by the first mode in which the character A appears or the second mode in which the character B appears (see FIG. 76).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the suggestion effect.

(12) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11),
Variable display means (for example, the effect display device 5) capable of executing variable display is provided, and the variable display means executes variable display a predetermined number of times from the start of variable display until the display result of variable display is derived and displayed. The predetermined variable display (for example, pseudo-continuous production) can be executed, and the specific display has a different timing for changing the display mode according to the type of the predetermined variable display (for example, active for changing the display mode of the active display) The execution timing of the display change effect may be determined at a determination rate according to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determined according to whether or not the big hit determination is made (see FIG. 77).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the production and improve the interest of the game.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko gaming machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in a main board | substrate. It is a front view showing the first production unit and the second production unit. (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit, and (B) is a rear view showing the first effect unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which looked at the structure of the 1st production unit from diagonally forward. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which looked at the structure of the 1st production unit from diagonally behind. (A) is a front view which shows a drive unit, (B) is a rear view which shows a drive unit. (A) is a front view which shows a drive base, (B) is a front view which shows a rotation member. (A)-(C) are explanatory drawings which show the effect | action of a drive unit. (A) (B) is explanatory drawing which similarly shows the effect | action of a drive unit. (A) is a front view showing the second effect unit, and (B) is a rear view showing the second effect unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which looked at the structure of the 2nd production unit from diagonally forward. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which looked at the structure of the 2nd production unit from diagonally behind. (A) is a schematic diagram showing each movable base when the movable body is in the second standby position, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing each movable base when the movable body starts moving toward the second advance position. It is. (A) is the schematic which shows each movable base when the movable body is moving toward the 2nd advance position, (B) is the outline which shows each movable base when the movable body stops in the 2nd advance position. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram showing each rendering unit when the movable body is in the second standby position, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing each rendering unit when the movable body starts moving toward the second advance position. It is. It is the schematic which shows each production | presentation part when a movable body stops in the 2nd advance position. (A) is a rear view showing the second effect part when the movable body is in the second standby position, and (B) is a rear view showing the second effect part when the movable body starts moving to the second advance position. It is. (A) is a front view which shows a light-guide plate apparatus, (B) is AA sectional drawing of (A). (A) is an enlarged front view which shows the principal part of a light-guide plate apparatus, (B) is BB sectional drawing of (A), (C) is an enlarged view which shows the principal part of (B). It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the movement area | region of each movable body, and a light-guide plate apparatus. (A) is a movable body movement mode determination table, (B) is a light guide plate light emission mode determination table, (C) is a movable body LED light emission mode determination table, and (D) is an explanatory view showing an effect display device display mode determination table. is there. (A) is an aspect of the pattern 1 of the composite effect, and (B) is an explanatory view showing an aspect of the pattern 2 of the composite effect. (A) is an aspect of the pattern 3 of the composite effect, and (B) is an explanatory view showing an aspect of the pattern 4 of the composite effect. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state before a composite effect, (B) is explanatory drawing of the light-guide plate in the state of (A), (C) is explanatory drawing of the effect display apparatus in the state of (A), (D) These are explanatory drawings of the 1st movable body and the 2nd movable body in the state of (A). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state at the time of the light emission production | presentation start of the light guide plate in the pattern 1 of composite production, (B) is explanatory drawing of the light guide plate in the state of (A), (C) is in the state of (A). Explanatory drawing of an effect display apparatus, (D) is explanatory drawing of the 1st movable body and 2nd movable body in the state of (A). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state at the time of the operation | movement start of the 1st movable body and 2nd movable body in the pattern 1 of a composite effect, (B) is explanatory drawing of the light-guide plate in the state of (A), (C) is. Explanatory drawing of the production | presentation display apparatus in the state of (A), (D) is explanatory drawing of the 1st movable body and 2nd movable body in the state of (A). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state at the time of the completion | finish of operation | movement of the 1st movable body and 2nd movable body in the pattern 1 of a composite effect, (B) is explanatory drawing of the light-guide plate in the state of (A), (C) is. Explanatory drawing of the production | presentation display apparatus in the state of (A), (D) is explanatory drawing of the 1st movable body and 2nd movable body in the state of (A). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state at the time of the light emission effect of movable body LED in the pattern 1 of a composite effect, (B) is explanatory drawing of the light-guide plate in the state of (A), (C) is in the state of (A). Explanatory drawing of an effect display apparatus, (D) is explanatory drawing of the 1st movable body and 2nd movable body in the state of (A). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state at the time of the display effect of the effect display apparatus in the pattern 1 of a composite effect, (B) is explanatory drawing of the light-guide plate in the state of (A), (C) is in the state of (A). Explanatory drawing of an effect display apparatus, (D) is explanatory drawing of the 1st movable body and 2nd movable body in the state of (A). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state at the time of the light emission effect of the light-guide plate in the pattern 3 of a composite effect, (B) is explanatory drawing which shows the state at the time of the display effect of the effect display apparatus in the pattern 3 of a composite effect. (A) (B) is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the pattern 2 of a composite effect. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the symbol designation | designated command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance specific area | region and a holding buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the command storage area at the time of a start winning prize. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation symbol variation start process in an production | presentation control process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the execution timing of an active display change effect and a suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the final display mode determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a change pattern determination table, a false suggestion effect execution determination table, and a suggestion effect mode determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change in effect control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation symbol fluctuation | variation stop process in an effect control process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an active display change effect and a suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows a quasi-continuous production pattern determination table, an active display change effect execution determination table, and an active display change effect execution timing determination table.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, embodiments (embodiments) of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration on the main board. In the following, the front side of FIG. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the back side is the back (rear) side, and the vertical and horizontal directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front side are shown. This will be explained as a standard. In addition, the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a facing surface that faces a player who plays a game on the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. A pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as a gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board 2 (also referred to as a gauge board) that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base) that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. Frame) 3. A game area 10 having a substantially circular shape in front view surrounded by the guide rails 2b is formed in the game board 2. In this game area 10, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a ball striking device (not shown) and driven. Further, the gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the gaming area 10 can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area 10 can be seen through the glass window 50a.

  The game board 2 is formed from a synthetic resin material having translucency such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, methacrylic resin or the like in a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and an obstruction nail (not shown) or a guide rail 2b is formed on the front of the game board surface. Etc., and a spacer member (not shown) that is integrally attached to the back side of the board surface plate. In addition, the game board 2 may be comprised with the plywood board.

  A first special symbol display 4A and a second special symbol display 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower right position of the game area 10). Each of the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B is a special symbol (special identification information) that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be identified in a special symbol game as an example of a variable display game. Is also displayed so as to be variable (also referred to as variable display or variable display). Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol indicator 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  An effect display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area 10 on the game board 2. The effect display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 5, the first special symbol display by the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display by the second special symbol display 4B in the special game are respectively displayed. In the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R serving as a plurality of variable display portions such as three, for example, effect symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decoration identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed. This variation display of the effect symbol is also included in the variation display game.

  As described above, in the display area of the effect display device 5, a special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display 4A or a special graphic using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display 4B. In synchronization with the figure game, a variable display of a plurality of types of effect symbols each of which can be identified is performed, and a definite effect symbol (final stop symbol) that is a variable display result is derived and displayed.

  The effect display device 5 is disposed on the back side of the game board 2 and can be visually recognized through an opening 2 c formed in the game board 2. Note that a frame-shaped center decorative frame 51 is provided in the opening 2 c in the game board 2. Between the back surface of the game board 2 and the effect display device 5, a first effect unit 300 and a second effect unit 400, which will be described later, are provided. In addition, a light guide plate device 500 is provided in front of the first effect unit 300 and the second effect unit 400, and the first effect unit 300 and the second effect unit 400 are movable via a light guide plate 501 described later. The display screen of the body (see FIG. 30) and the effect display device 5 can be visually recognized.

  A first reserved memory display area 5D and a second reserved memory display area 5U are set in two places on the left and right of the display area of the effect display device 5. In the first hold memory display area 5D and the second hold memory display area 5U, the hold memory display for displaying the variable hold memory number (the special figure hold memory number) corresponding to the special figure game is specified.

  Here, the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the special game is that the game ball passes through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Generated based on the start winning by entering (entering). In other words, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the effect symbol is established, but the variable display game based on the start condition established previously is being executed. When the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

  A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided above the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B to display the number of special figure hold memories in a identifiable manner. It has been. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified.

  Below the effect display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening as a starting region (first starting region) that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state as a vertical position and an expanded open state as a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a second starting prize opening is formed as a starting region (second starting region).

  A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the fact that the game balls that have passed (entered) the first start winning opening are detected by the first start opening switch 22A. If the number of reserved memories is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the first start condition is satisfied. In addition, based on the fact that the game balls that have passed (entered) the second start winning opening are detected by the second start opening switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls are paid out as prize balls. If the special figure holding storage number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the second start condition is satisfied.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 forms a large winning opening as a specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state by a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 shown in FIG. In this way, the special prize opening as the specific area is an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a player who cannot pass (enter) (or difficult to pass (enter)). Changes to a closed state that is disadvantageous to the user.

  A predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the fact that the game balls that have passed (entered) through the big prize opening are detected by the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Therefore, if the special prize winning ball device 7 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special prize winning opening, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to get a prize ball by passing (entering) the gaming ball into the special prize winning port. This is a disadvantageous second state.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided above the second holding display 25B. Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, at the lowermost part of the game area 10, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and an effect LED 9 is provided in the periphery of the gaming area 10. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area 10 is provided.

  A gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine can be supplied to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area 10 to a launching device (not shown). An upper plate 90 (hit ball supply plate) that is held (stored) is provided. A lower plate 91 that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate 90 so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided at the lower portion of the gaming machine frame 3. The tilt operation of the stick controller 31A attached to the member forming the lower plate 91 is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A, and the pressing operation performed on the push button 31B provided on the member forming the upper plate 90 is pushed. It is detected by the sensor 35B.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, as shown in FIG. 2, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, an LED control board 14, various types of data transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. Various boards such as a relay board 15 for relaying control signals, a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. The display of fluctuation of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20 is performed. It also has a function to control. On the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 that detect the game ball that has passed through the pass gate 41 are displayed on the main board 11. The transmission wiring is connected. Further, display control is performed on the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, the normal symbol display 20, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, and the like. Wiring for transmitting a command signal is connected.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal, for example. The effect control command includes, for example, a change pattern designation command indicating a change pattern indicating a change mode such as a change time of an effect symbol, a type of reach effect, and the presence / absence of a pseudo-ream.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and provides a ROM 101 (ReadOnlyMemory 101) for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work area. RAM 102 (Random Access Memory 102), CPU 103 (Central Processing Unit 103) that executes a control program by executing a game control program, random number circuit 104 that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of CPU 103, and I / O 105 (Input / Outputport 105). As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and produces an effect display. Device 5, speaker 8L, 8R, production LED 9, first production motor 311L, 311R, second production motor 425, movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, movable body LEDs 407A to 407D, first position sensor 329, second position sensor Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical components for rendering such as 432 and the light guide plate LED 502 and various circuits for detecting the operations of the electrical components such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are mounted.

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program and fixed data, a RAM 122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 120, and an effect display device. 5, a display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in FIG. 5, a random number circuit 124 that updates the numerical data indicating the random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120, and the I / O 125. And are installed. As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the gaming area 10, the normal game with the normal symbol display 20 is started. After the start of the normal symbol change, if the specified time, which is the normal symbol change time, has elapsed, and the normal symbols other than the normal symbol are displayed in a stopped state, the normal symbol change display result is “out of normal”. Become. If the specific normal symbol (the symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the variation display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”, and the expansion / release control (tilt control) of the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B is performed, and the predetermined symbol is displayed. When time elapses, normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed.

  Based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied after the first special condition game or the big hit game state has ended, for example, after the first start condition is satisfied because the game ball has won the first start winning opening, etc. Then, a special game is started by the first special symbol display 4A. In addition, after the second start condition is established because the game ball has won the second start winning opening, etc., the second start condition is established, for example, due to the end of the previous special game or the big hit game state. Based on this, a special game is started by the second special symbol display 4B.

  In the special game, after starting the variable display of the special symbol, the fixed special symbol (special graphic display result) is derived and displayed when the variable display time elapses. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is displayed in a stopped state, the result is “big hit” as the specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol is displayed in a stopped state, it becomes “out of place”. After the fluctuation display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as “round game”) is executed a predetermined number of times.

  In the big hit gaming state, a special winning prize ball device 7 has a special prize opening door for a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 second) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls. In the period until the occurrence of, the grand prize opening is opened. Thereby, the round which makes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 the 1st state (open state) advantageous for a player is performed.

  A special prize-winning ball device that receives a game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closes the big prize-winning slot, with the grand prize-winning door that has opened the grand prize-winning port during the round. 7 is changed to the second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. The round that is the opening cycle of the big prize opening can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “16”, etc.).

  In the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the effect display device 5, in response to the start of the special symbol game, the effect symbol variable display is started. In the period from the start of the variation display of the effect symbol to the end of the variation display, the variation display state of the effect symbol may be a predetermined reach state. The reach state is a display in which variation continues for effect symbols that are not yet stopped when the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination. A state or a display state in which all or a part of the effect symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, among the multiple types of big hit combinations, the fixed effect symbol that is a predetermined normal big hit combination (also referred to as “non-probable variable big hit combination”) is stopped and displayed, and the variation display result is “non-probable big hit bonus”. ”Is controlled to the big hit state, and after the end, time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed. By performing the time reduction control, the special symbol change display time (special figure change time) in the special figure game is shortened compared to the normal state. In the short-time control, so-called electric Chu support is performed in which the winning frequency of the normal symbol is increased and the winning frequency to the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is increased. In the time-saving control, one of the conditions is established first, that is, a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the big hit gaming state ends, and the fluctuation display result is “big hit”. Sometimes it just needs to end.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, among the multiple types of big hit combinations, the finalized design symbol that becomes a predetermined probability variable big hit combination (also referred to as “probable big hit combination”) is stopped and the fluctuation display result is “probable big hit” When it becomes, it is controlled to the big hit state, and after the end, probability variation control (probability variation control) is performed together with time reduction control. By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variation display result is “big hit” in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than that in the normal state. When the condition that the variable display result is “big hit” and the game is controlled again to the big hit gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is established, the probability variation control is performed a predetermined number of times after the big hit gaming state ends (for example, the same as the number of time reductions 100) When the special figure game is executed, the probability variation control lottery executed every time the special figure game is started after the jackpot game state is finished is determined to have “probable fall”. When it ends, etc.

  When the short-time control is performed, the normal symbol variation time (normal diagram variation time) in the regular game is shorter than that in the normal state, and the regular symbol variation display result is “normal diagram” in each regular game. The tilt control time for performing the tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the probability of “winning” is higher than that in the normal state, and the fluctuation display result is “normal hitting”. The second start condition can be established by making it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as control for making it longer than in the normal state, and control for increasing the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control (electricity chew support control, high opening control) that is advantageous for the player by enhancing the performance is performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure is likely to be established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. Time to become is shortened.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When game control timer interrupt processing is started in the game control main processing, switch processing, main-side error processing, information output processing, game random number update processing, special symbol process processing, normal symbol process processing, and command control processing are executed.

  In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit (not shown) is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display 4A or (2) Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of the display operation in the special symbol display 4B and setting of the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  In the special symbol process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is a first start winning or a second starting winning. If there is a winning, the special symbol display result determination, jackpot type determination, variation pattern A random number value for determination or the like is extracted, and a start winning process is executed for storing (storing) at the highest level of empty entries in the first special figure reservation storage unit or the second special figure reservation storage unit.

  Further, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to start the special game based on the presence / absence of the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit or the second special figure hold storage unit, and the special figure display result. A special decision that determines (predetermines) whether or not the variation display result of a special symbol or production symbol is to be a “hit” based on numerical data indicating a random number for judgment before the variation display result is derived and displayed. The symbol normal process is executed. That is, when starting the variation display of the special figure game, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to derive and display the jackpot display result as the display result of the variation display based on the random number value stored when the start winning occurs. Processing to determine (lottery) is executed.

  Next, a variation pattern setting process for determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types, a special symbol variation process for performing a setting for varying a special symbol and a process for measuring an elapsed time after the special symbol starts variation, A special symbol stop process is performed to perform settings for stopping the change of the special symbol and stopping and displaying (deriving) the fixed special symbol. In addition, when the variation display result is “big hit”, the big hit release pre-processing, the big hit open process, the big hit release post-processing, and the big hit end process are performed to open and close the big winning opening in the big hit gaming state.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. First, the effect control CPU 120 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. When a timer interruption occurs in the main process, a command analysis process, an effect control process, an effect random number update process, and a volume adjustment process are executed.

  In the effect control process, the hold display update process for updating the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U of the display display device 5 to a display corresponding to the storage contents of the hold storage buffer. Execute. Next, in accordance with the value of the production control process flag, a variation pattern designation command reception waiting process for confirming whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received from the game control microcomputer 100, and variation of the production symbol are started. While controlling the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitoring the end of the variation time according to the process data set in the effect symbol variation start process to be controlled and the process symbol variation start process , Display control of the production display device 5, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, production LED 9, movable body LEDs 307L and 307R, movable body LEDs 407A to 407D, light emission of the light guide plate LED 502, first movable body of the first production unit 300 Driving control of the second movable body 402 of 302L, 302R and the second rendering unit 400 Demonstration symbol variation during processing, a stop variation in performance symbols displayed results performance symbol variation stop processing for performing control deriving Show (stop symbols) performed to perform like.

  In the big hit display process, after the end of the variation time, the effect display device 5 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit. In the big hit game processing, control during the big hit game is performed. In the big hit end effect process, the effect display device 5 performs display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended.

  In this way, the effect control CPU 120 can execute various effects related to the game such as the effect display variable display control and the notice effect based on the effect control command (control information) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100. Has been.

  The notice control effect executed by the effect control CPU 120 during the display of the effect symbols is, for example, a jackpot notice effect that suggests the possibility of a big hit, a reach notice that indicates whether or not to reach, and a stop symbol that indicates whether or not to reach. Multiple notices that are executed at the start of change display or when reach is established, such as a stop symbol notice to notify, a latent notice to notify whether or not the game state is a probability fluctuation state (whether it is latent or not) Including.

  In the present embodiment, a light guide plate effect (light emission effect) by the light guide plate device 500 described below, a display effect by the effect display device 5, a movable body effect in which the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 operate, Various effects such as a combined effect in which a movable body effect, a light guide plate effect, and a display effect are performed, and an operation effect that is executed on condition that the player operates the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be executed as various notices. Yes.

  Next, the first effect unit 300 and the second effect unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the first effect unit and the second effect unit.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the base frame 200 is formed in a substantially square frame shape, and is attached to a position corresponding to the opening 2 c on the back surface of the game board 2. The effect display device 5 is attached to the back surface of the base frame 200 so as to close the substantially square-shaped opening 201 formed in the base frame 200. A first effect unit 300 is provided on the upper side of the base frame 200, and a second effect unit 400 is provided on the lower side. In the present embodiment, the first effect unit 300 and the second effect unit 400 are provided in one base frame 200, but may be provided in separate base bodies.

  The first effect unit 300 includes a base member 301 attached to the upper side of the base frame 200, a first standby position above the base member 301 (position indicated by a solid line in FIG. 3), and a first advance position below (see FIG. 3, the first movable bodies 302 </ b> L and 302 </ b> R provided so as to be movable obliquely in the vertical direction. The second effect unit 400 includes a base body 401 attached to the lower side of the base frame 200, a second standby position below the base body 401 (position indicated by a solid line in FIG. 3), and an upper second advance position (see FIG. 3, a second movable body 402 including a first movable portion 402 </ b> A, a second movable portion 402 </ b> B, and a third movable portion 402 </ b> C provided to be movable between the second movable body 402 </ b> C and the second movable body 402 </ b> C.

  The first movable bodies 302L and 302R of the first effect unit 300 partially overlap with the display screen (opening 201) of the effect display device 5 at the first standby position, and the entirety of the effect display device 5 at the first advance position. It is superimposed on the display screen (opening 201). On the other hand, the second movable body 402 partially overlaps the display screen (opening 201) of the effect display device 5 at the second standby position, and the entire display screen (opening 201) of the effect display device 5 at the second advance position. Superimpose on. The first movable bodies 302L and 302R are arranged on the left and right sides of the second movable body 402 moved to the second advanced position when moved to the first advanced position. In the present embodiment, the first standby position and the second standby position are the initial driving positions.

  Next, the 1st production unit 300 is demonstrated based on FIGS. 4A is a front view showing the first effect unit, and FIG. 4B is a rear view showing the first effect unit. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the configuration of the first effect unit is viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view showing a state of the configuration of the first effect unit as viewed obliquely from behind. 7A is a front view showing the drive unit, and FIG. 7B is a rear view showing the drive unit. 8A is a front view showing a drive base, and FIG. 8B is a front view showing a rotating member. 9A to 9C are explanatory diagrams showing the operation of the drive unit. 10A and 10B are explanatory views showing the operation of the drive unit. In FIGS. 4 and 5, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are indicated by dots in order to facilitate understanding.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the base member 301 of the first effect unit 300 includes an upper side portion 301A, a left side portion 301B that hangs downward from the left end of the upper side portion 301A, and a right side portion that hangs downward from the right end of the upper side portion 301A. It is formed in a substantially downward U-shape from 301C. The first movable bodies 302L and 302R are provided on the front side of the base member 301 so as to be able to move obliquely in the vertical direction so as to be separated from each other toward the first advance position, and on the front side of the upper side portion 301A at the first standby position. Placed in. In the first standby position, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are arranged in parallel so that the inner oblique sides of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are in contact with each other. Further, a decorative portion 303 capable of emitting light is extended in the left-right direction above the first movable bodies 302L and 302R in the upper side portion 301A. The first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the decoration portion 303 are often used as a title panel portion on which, for example, the model name (title) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the front surface.

  In addition, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are provided with a plurality of movable body LEDs 307L and 307R on the front side, and the effect of the rendering can be improved by the light of the movable body LEDs 307L and 307R. Note that the movable body LEDs 307L and 307R are not limited to a mode in which light is directly emitted forward provided on the front surfaces of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R, but the first is a cover body made of a synthetic resin material having translucency. By forming the front surfaces of the movable bodies 302L and 302R and disposing the movable body LEDs 307L and 307R behind the first movable bodies 302L and 302R, the light of the movable body LEDs 307L and 307R is indirectly forward through the cover body. You may make it radiate | emit to.

  The base member 301 is formed of a light-transmitting synthetic resin material, and light from light emitting diodes (LEDs (not shown)) provided on the front surfaces of various substrates 304A, 304B, and 304C provided on the back surface side. As a result, the front surface emits light.

  Drive units 305L and 305R for driving the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are provided on the back surfaces of the left side portion 301B and the right side portion 301C of the base member 301. The drive units 305L and 305R are first effect motors 311L and 311R including drive bases 310L and 310R attached to the rear surfaces of the left and right sides 301B and 301C of the base member 301 and stepping motors attached to the drive bases 310L and 310R. And first to fourth gears 312A to 312D and rotating members 313L and 313R constituting power transmission means for transmitting the power of the first effect motors 311L and 311R to the first movable bodies 302L and 302R.

  In addition, fixed rails 350L and 350R are attached to the back surfaces of the left side portion 301B and the right side portion 301C of the base member 301 along the respective inner sides, and the first movable body 302L is attached to the fixed rails 350L and 350R. , 302R are slidably provided on slide rails 351L, 351R. Accordingly, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are guided to move in the diagonally up and down direction by the slide rails 351L and 351R that slide with respect to the fixed rails 350L and 350R provided in a substantially C shape when viewed from the back. Although not shown in detail, the slide rails 351L and 351R are slidably provided on the rear surfaces of the fixed rails 350L and 350R, but the front surfaces of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are the front surfaces of the base member 301. Arranged on the side. Further, lock plates 306L and 306R connected to the rotating members 313L and 313R are attached to the back surfaces of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R so as to be slidable in the left-right direction.

  Next, details of the drive units 305L and 305R will be described. Since the left and right drive units 305L and 305R are configured in substantially the same manner, the left drive unit 305L will be described below, and a detailed description of the right drive unit 305R will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, a first effect motor 311L is attached to the back surface of the drive base 310L. The drive shaft 311a of the first effect motor 311L is inserted through the drive base 310L and protrudes to the front side, and the first gear 312A is fixed to the tip of the drive shaft 311a. Rotating shafts 320B, 320C, and 320D that face in the front-rear direction protrude from the back surface of the drive base 310L, and the second gear 312B that meshes with the first gear 312A can pivot on the rotating shaft 320B. A third gear 312C that meshes with the second gear 312B is pivotally supported by the pivot shaft 320C, and a fourth gear 312D that meshes with the third gear 312C is pivotable by the pivot shaft 320D. Is pivotally supported.

  A connecting piece 321 extends from a predetermined position on the rear peripheral edge of the fourth gear 312D in a direction away from the rotation center, and a connecting shaft for connecting to the rotating member 313L is provided on the back surface of the connecting piece 321. 322 protrudes toward the rear side.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, a guide groove 323 for moving and guiding the lock plate 306L is formed in the drive base 310L. The guide groove 323 includes a guide portion 323A extending obliquely downward to the left so as to be substantially parallel to the fixed rail 350L, and a restricting portion 323B bending in a hook shape from the upper end of the guide portion 323A to the left. In this guide groove 323, a guided shaft 342 of a lock plate 306L to be described later is inserted. The connecting portion between the guide portion 323A and the restricting portion 323B is formed in a curved shape, so that the guided shaft 342 can smoothly move between the guide portion 323A and the restricting portion 323B.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, a bearing hole 325 is formed at the left end portion of the rotation member 313L, and a rotation shaft is provided in the bearing hole 325 so as to project from the back surface of the drive base 310L and face in the front-rear direction. By inserting 324, the rotation member 313L is pivotally supported around the rotation shaft 324 on the back side of the drive base 310L. From the vicinity of the bearing hole 325, the first elongated hole 326 extends linearly in a direction away from the bearing hole 325, and the connecting shaft 322 of the fourth gear 312D is connected to the first elongated hole 326. It is slidably inserted.

  From the vicinity of the left end portion of the first long hole 326, the second long hole 327 extends in an arc shape in a direction away from the bearing hole 325. The second long hole 327 includes a lock plate 306L described later. The guided shaft 342 is slidably inserted. The right end of the second long hole 327 is disposed below the left end of the first long hole 326, and the second long hole 327 is provided so as to be slightly inclined with respect to the first long hole 326.

  A detection piece 328 detected by a first position sensor 329 provided on the back surface of the drive base 310L is formed above the first long hole 326. In the present embodiment, the detection piece 328 is detected by the first position sensor 329 when the first movable body 302L is in the first standby position.

  The lock plate 306L is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and guide holes 340A and 340B facing in the left-right direction are arranged side by side in the lower part. The guide holes 340A and 340B are respectively inserted with left and right guide shafts 341A and 341B projecting from the back surface of the first movable body 302L, so that the lock plate 306L is connected to the drive base 310L on the back side and the front surface. The first movable body 302L is provided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the first movable body 302L.

  A cylindrical guided shaft 342 projects from the back surface of the lock plate 306L. The guided shaft 342 passes through the guide groove 323 of the drive base 310L, and is further inserted into the second long hole 327 of the rotating member 313L on the back surface side.

  In the drive unit 305L configured as described above, when the drive shaft 311a of the first effect motor 311L rotates, this rotational force is rotated from the first gear 312A, the second gear 312B, the third gear 312C, and the fourth gear 312D. By being transmitted to the moving member 313L and further transmitted from the rotating member 313L to the lock plate 306L, the first movable body 302L provided with the lock plate 306L is positioned between the first standby position and the first advanced position. Moving. That is, the first gear 312A, the second gear 312B, the third gear 312C, the fourth gear 312D, the rotating member 313L, and the lock plate 306L transmit the power of the first effect motor 311L to the first movable body 302L. It constitutes a power transmission mechanism.

  As shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, when the first movable body 302L is in the first standby position, the connecting shaft 322 contacts the end of the first long hole 326 on the rotating shaft 324 side. Therefore, the rotating member 313L is maintained in a state inclined obliquely upward and leftward in the rear view. On the other hand, the guided shaft 342 is disposed in the restricting portion 323 </ b> B above the guide groove 323. In this state, the connecting shaft 322 abuts against the end of the first elongated hole 326 on the rotating shaft 324 side, so that the counterclockwise rotation of the rotating member 313L is restricted.

  Specifically, when the first movable body 302L is in the first standby position, the rotation shaft 320D of the fourth gear 312D and the rotation shaft 324 of the rotation member 313L are arranged on the left and right, and the connection shaft 322 is rotated. The rotating shaft 324 is located on the rotating shaft 324 side from the position directly above the moving shaft 320D, and is disposed at an upper position between the rotating shaft 320D and the rotating shaft 324. The connecting shaft 322 is in contact with the end of the first elongated hole 326 on the rotating shaft 324 side, thereby restricting the clockwise rotation in the rear view, whereby the rotating member 313L is counterclockwise in the rear view. The rotation is restricted. That is, the connecting shaft 322 of the fourth gear 312D and the first long hole 326 of the rotating member 313L rotate the rotating member 313L in the clockwise direction when the first movable body 302L is in the first standby position. The 1st lock mechanism (self-locking mechanism) which regulates is comprised.

  Further, since the guided shaft 342 is arranged on the restricting portion 323B, the downward movement of the guided shaft 342 is restricted, and the turning member 313L is rotated clockwise by the first lock mechanism. Since the movement of the second elongated hole 327 in the obliquely lower left direction is restricted, the movement of the guided shaft 342 toward the guide portion 323A is restricted.

  Specifically, the lock plate 306L provided on the first movable body 302L has all of the loads on the lock plate 306L and the first movable body 302L because the guided shaft 342 is disposed in the substantially horizontal regulating portion 323B. Since it is received at the lower side of the restricting portion 323B, it is maintained at the upper position of the guide groove 323. Further, the second elongated hole 327 of the rotating member 313L is arranged so as to vertically intersect the substantially horizontal restricting portion 323B, so that the restricting portion 323B of the guided shaft 342 is directed to the guide portion 323A side. Since the movement is restricted, the guided shaft 342 is prevented from moving from the restriction part 323B toward the guide part 323A due to factors such as vibration.

  That is, the restricting portion 323B of the guide groove 323 in the drive base 310L, the guided shaft 342 of the lock plate 306L, and the guided shaft 342 are moved from the restricting portion 323B to the guide portion 323A side. The second long hole 327 that restricts the movement of the first movable body 302L is the second lock mechanism (self-locking mechanism) that restricts the downward movement of the lock plate 306L and the first movable body 302L when the first movable body 302L is in the first standby position. ).

Here, the drive status of the drive unit 305L will be described with reference to FIGS. In FIGS. 9 and 10, the rotating member 313 </ b> L is indicated by dots in order to help understanding.
First, as shown in FIG. 9A, when the first effect motor 311L is driven in a state where the first movable body 302L is in the first standby position, the rotational force of the drive shaft 311a is changed to the first gear 312A and the first gear 312A. It is transmitted to the second gear 312B, the third gear 312C, and the fourth gear 312D.

  Then, as the connecting shaft 322 of the fourth gear 312D rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the back, the rotating member 313L rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the back with the rotating shaft 324 as the center, as shown in FIG. 9B. Start turning. As a result, the second elongated hole 327 moves obliquely downward and leftward when viewed from the back, so that the guided shaft 342 is moved toward the guide portion 323A. When the connecting shaft 322 rotates to a position immediately above the rotation shaft 320D of the fourth gear 312D, the rotation restriction state of the rotation member 313L by the first lock mechanism is released and the restriction portion 323B of the guided shaft 342 is released. The restriction on the movement to the guide portion 323A is released, and thereby the restriction on the downward movement of the guided shaft 342 by the second lock mechanism is released, so that the movement restriction state on the lower side of the first movable body 302L is released. .

  When the guided shaft 342 moves only in the left direction when moving the restricting portion 323B, the lock plate 306L slides to the left in the rear view with respect to the first movable body 302L, but the first movable body 302L Since it does not substantially descend, the first movable body 302L is prevented from slightly unnaturally moving by the lock and unlock operation.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9C, when the connecting shaft 322 moves to the guide groove 323 side from the position directly above the rotation shaft 320D of the fourth gear 312D, the guided shaft 342 enters the guide portion 323A, and the One movable body 302L can move from the first standby position toward the first advance position. Then, as shown in FIG. 10A, when the connecting shaft 322 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the back, the guided shaft 342 is pushed downward by the second long hole 327 and right along the guide groove 323. By moving diagonally downward, the first movable body 302L moves diagonally downward to the right along the fixed rail 350L.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 10B, the rotation of the rotation member 313L is restricted by the connection shaft 322 being positioned at the lower end of the guide portion 323A, and the first effect motor 311L is in a non-energized state. Thus, the first movable body 302L is held at the lower first advance position by its own weight.

  Further, when the first movable body 302L is raised from the first advanced position to the first standby position, the drive shaft 311a of the first effect motor 311L is driven in the opposite direction to that when the first movable body 302L is lowered. As a result, the rotation member 313L rotates clockwise around the rotation axis 320D, so that the guided shaft 342 is pushed upward by the second long hole 327 and is diagonally left along the guide groove 323. Move upward. The guided shaft 342 reaches the upper end of the guide portion 323A and moves to the restricting portion 323B, whereby the downward movement of the guided shaft 342 is restricted by the second lock mechanism, and the connecting shaft 322 is moved to the first position. By contacting the end of the first long hole 326 on the rotating shaft 324 side, the first locking mechanism restricts the counterclockwise rotation of the rotating member 313L as viewed from the back.

  Further, since the second long hole 327 is formed in an arc shape instead of a linear shape, for example, as shown in FIG. 9C, when the guided shaft 342 is near the upper portion of the guide portion 323A, The second elongated hole 327 intersects the guide portion 323A without being parallel.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention, the first standby position is different from the first standby position by the first effect motors 311L and 311R which are driving sources. Driving force transmission means (for example, first to fourth) that transmits the power of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R that move between the standby positions and the first presentation motors 311L and 311R to the first movable bodies 302L and 302R. Gears 312A to 312D, rotating members 313L, 313R) and a first lock mechanism (for example, a fourth gear 312D) that restricts movement of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R toward the second standby position at the first standby position. The connecting shaft 322, the first elongated hole 326 of the rotating member 313L) and the second lock mechanism (for example, the restricting portion 323B of the guide groove 323, the guided shaft 342 of the lock plate 306L, the second The driving force transmitting means includes at least rotating members 313L and 313R as specific transmitting members operated by the first effect motors 311L and 311R. The rotating members 313L and 313R include A part of each of the first lock mechanism and the second lock mechanism (for example, the first long hole 326 and the second long hole 327) is provided.

  In this way, the movement of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R to the second standby position can be sufficiently restricted by the two lock mechanisms, and the one rotating member 313L and 313R can be controlled by the two lock mechanisms. Since it can utilize for each regulation, a structure can be simplified and manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  Further, the connecting shaft 322 of the fourth gear 312D as the first locking mechanism and the first long hole 326 of the rotating members 313L and 313R are the rotating members when the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are in the first standby position. The first movable bodies 302L and 302R are the first movable bodies 302L and 302R that restrict the rotation of 313L and 313R, and the restriction portion 323B of the guide groove 323 as the second lock mechanism, the guided shaft 342 of the lock plate 306L, and the second long hole 327. By restricting the lowering of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R when in the standby position, the rotating members 313L and 313R and the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are regulated by different lock mechanisms, respectively. The movement of the bodies 302L and 302R can be preferably controlled.

  As described above, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are not restricted by being held by the two lock mechanisms at the first standby position, but the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are directly controlled by one second lock mechanism. And the first movable body via the rotating members 313L and 313R as specific transmission members that transmit the power of the first effect motors 311L and 311R to the first movable bodies 302L and 302R by another first lock mechanism. Since 302L and 302R are indirectly held, the load on one lock mechanism can be distributed.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are moved from the first standby position to the first advanced position side by the first lock mechanism and the second lock mechanism when they are in the first standby position. Although regulated, the load of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R is basically received at the lower side of the regulating portion 323B via the guided shaft 342, and the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are supported by the rotating members 313L and 313R. It is difficult to apply the load. Therefore, the frictional resistance generated between the connecting shaft 322 and the peripheral edge of the first long hole 326 when the connecting shaft 322 constituting the first lock mechanism is rotated to be in a restricted state or released is reduced. The load applied to the first effect motors 311L and 311R that change the first lock mechanism between the restricted state and the released state can be reduced as much as possible.

  In the present embodiment, the first lock mechanism and the second lock mechanism are different from each other in the configuration and structure of the mechanism portion that restricts the target member, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the first lock mechanism and the second lock mechanism may have the same structure.

  Further, the rotation members 313L and 313R are provided separately from the first long hole 326 as the first mechanism part constituting the first lock mechanism and the second mechanism constituting the second lock mechanism. By having the second long hole 327 as the mechanism part, the guide shaft 322 that moves the first long hole 326 as the first mechanism part and the guided hole that moves through the second long hole 327 as the second mechanism part. It is possible to avoid problems such as damage caused by contact with the shaft 342.

  Further, in a state where the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are in the first standby position, the first effect motors 311L and 311R are driven, and the connecting shaft 322 rotates to a position immediately above the rotation shaft 320D of the fourth gear 312D. Then, the rotation restriction state of the rotation members 313L and 313R by the first lock mechanism is released, and the movement restriction of the guided shaft 342 from the restriction portion 323B to the guide portion 323A is released, thereby the second lock mechanism. Since the downward movement restriction of the guided shaft 342 is released, the downward movement restriction state of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R is released. In this way, the two locks using the first effect motors 311L and 311R for moving the first movable bodies 302L and 302R can be obtained without separately providing drive sources for the respective lock mechanisms. Since each mechanism can be regulated and released, the structure can be simplified and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7B, when the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are in the first standby position, the connecting shaft 322 of the fourth gear 312D as the first lock mechanism and the rotation members 313L and 313R The first elongate hole 326 is disposed at a position below the restricting portion 323B of the guide groove 323 as the second lock mechanism, the guided shaft 342 of the lock plate 306L, and the second elongate hole 327, so that the first movable hole The bodies 302L and 302R can be suitably restricted from moving at the first standby position.

  The second lock mechanism is connected to the guided shaft 342 provided in the first movable bodies 302L and 302R, the guide portion 323A of the guide groove 323 for moving and guiding the guided shaft 342, and the guide portion 323A. A restricting portion 323B that restricts the movement of the guided shaft 342 when the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are at the first standby position, and a guide portion 323A that acts on the guided shaft 342 to release the guide shaft 342 Position) and the second elongated hole 327 as an action portion that moves between the regulating portion 323B (regulated position) as a mechanism portion, and the rotating members 313L and 313R have the second elongated hole 327. The second locking mechanism 313L, 313R moves the guided shaft 342 by the second elongated hole 327, so that the second lock mechanism can be changed between the restricted state and the released state.

  That is, the first lock mechanism releases the rotation members 313L and 313R from the rotation restricted state by rotating the connecting shaft 322 by the first effect motors 311L and 311R that move the first movable bodies 302L and 302R. In contrast to the lock mechanism that changes the state, the second lock mechanism uses the operation (rotation) of the rotation members 313L and 313R released from the restricted state by the first lock mechanism. Since the lock mechanisms 302L and 302R are changed between the restricted state and the released state, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are moved without changing the respective lock mechanisms between the restricted state and the released state by separate drive sources. It is possible to change between the restricted state and the released state using the power of the one drive source to be performed.

  And since some of these 1st lock mechanisms and 2nd lock mechanisms are formed in one rotation member 313L, 313R, while being able to simplify the structure of drive unit 305L, 305R, reducing manufacturing cost. Can do.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the 1st movable bodies 302L and 302R were provided so that the up-down direction was movable between the 1st standby position and the 1st advance position, this invention is limited to this. It may be provided so as to be movable in the vertical direction, the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction. The first standby position is provided above the first advance position, but may be provided below the first advance position. Furthermore, it does not have to move linearly, for example, it may rotate.

  In the above embodiment, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are moved in the diagonally up and down direction by the first to fourth gears 312A to 312D as the driving force transmitting means and the rotating members 313L and 313R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the driving force transmission means may be configured by the above-described rotating gear, a gear mechanism including a rack and a pinion, or the like. You may be comprised by arm mechanisms like member 313L, 313R.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the 1st lock mechanism and the 2nd lock mechanism were comprised by the connection shaft and the elongate hole, this invention is not limited to this, In structure parts other than these It may be configured.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, among 1st-4th gear 312A-312D as a driving force transmission means, and rotation member 313L, 313R, rotation member 313L, 313R is made to each of 1st lock mechanism and 2nd lock mechanism. Although a part was formed, the present invention is not limited to this, and other constituent parts such as the first to fourth gears 312A to 312D are part of each of the first lock mechanism and the second lock mechanism. May be formed.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the 1st long hole 326 and the 2nd long hole 327 were formed in rotation member 313L, 313R, this invention is not limited to this, Rotation member 313L, A connecting shaft may be formed on 313R.

  In the embodiment, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are restricted from moving to the first advanced position by the two lock mechanisms (the first lock mechanism and the second lock mechanism) at the first standby position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement to the first advanced position may be restricted by three or more lock mechanisms. Furthermore, two or more components that constitute at least one of the first lock mechanism and the second lock mechanism may be formed on the rotating members 313L and 313R.

  Next, the 2nd production unit 400 is demonstrated based on FIGS. 11-18. 11A is a front view showing the second effect unit, and FIG. 11B is a rear view showing the second effect unit. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the configuration of the second effect unit is viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view showing the state of the second effect unit as viewed obliquely from behind. 14A is a schematic diagram showing each movable base when the movable body is in the second standby position, and FIG. 14B is each movable base when the movable body starts moving toward the second advance position. FIG. 15A is a schematic diagram showing each movable base when the movable body is moving toward the second advanced position, and FIG. 15B is each movable when the movable body stops at the second advanced position. It is the schematic which shows a base. FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram illustrating each rendering unit when the movable body is in the second standby position, and FIG. 16B illustrates each rendering unit when the movable body starts moving toward the second advance position. FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram illustrating each rendering unit when the movable body stops at the second advance position. 18A is a rear view showing the second rendering unit when the movable body is in the second standby position, and FIG. 18B is the second rendering unit when the movable body starts moving to the second advance position. FIG. In FIGS. 11, 12, 16, and 17, the second movable body 402 is indicated by dots to facilitate understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, the base body 401 of the second rendering unit 400 includes a base member 401 </ b> A that movably supports the second movable body 402, and a decorative member 401 </ b> B attached to the front side of the base member 401 </ b> A. The mounting member 401 </ b> C is attached to the back side of the base member 401 </ b> A and is attached to the lower side portion of the base frame 200. The base member 401A, the decorative member 401B, and the attachment member 401C are arranged apart from each other.

  The second movable body 402 movably provided with respect to the base body 401 includes a first movable portion 402A that is rotatably disposed between the base member 401A and the attachment member 401C, and the base member 401A and the attachment member 401C. And a third movable portion 402C that is rotatably disposed between the base member 401A and the decorative member 401B. ing.

  The first movable part 402A includes a first movable base 410A, a first effect part 411A attached to the front side of the first movable base 410A and covering the first movable base 410A, and a front side of the first effect part 411A. And a plurality of movable body LEDs 407A provided in. The second movable portion 402B is provided with respect to the second movable base 410B, the second rendering portion 411B that is attached to the front side of the second movable base 410B and covers the second movable base 410B, and the second rendering portion 411B. A second rendering unit 411D provided to be rotatable, a plurality of movable body LEDs 407B provided on the front side of the second rendering unit 411B, and a movable body LED 407D provided on the front side of the second rendering unit 411D. Has been. The third movable portion 402C includes a third movable base 410C, a third effect portion 411C that is attached to the front surface side of the third movable base 410C and covers the third movable base 410C, and a front surface side of the third effect portion 411C. And a plurality of movable body LEDs 407C provided in.

  In addition, movable body LED407A-407D is not restricted to the form which is provided in the front surface of each production | presentation part 411A-411D, and light is radiate | emitted directly ahead, Each production | presentation part 411A-411D is made from the synthetic resin material which has translucency. By forming and arranging the movable body LEDs 407A to 407D behind the respective production units 411A to 411D, the light of the movable body LEDs 407A to 407D is indirectly emitted forward through the respective production units 411A to 411D. It may be.

  The first movable base 410A of the first movable part 402A has a bearing hole 421 at the right end portion into which a rotating shaft 420 protruding from the right side of the back surface of the base member 401A is inserted, and is inserted into the bearing hole 421. The pivot shaft 420 is pivotably supported between a horizontal position (refer to FIG. 14A) facing left and right and an inclined position inclined obliquely upward to the left (refer to FIG. 15B). Has been. A bearing cover 422 attached to the base member 401A is disposed on the back side of the bearing hole 421 in the first movable base 410A, and deviation from the rotating shaft 420 is restricted. Further, a torsion spring 423 having one end locked to the first movable base 410A and the other end locked to the bearing cover 422 is provided between the first movable base 410A and the bearing cover 422. The first movable base 410A is constantly urged to rotate in the direction of the inclined position by the torsion spring 423.

  A second effect motor 425 is attached to the front right side of the base member 401A. The drive shaft 425a of the second effect motor 425 is inserted through the base member 401A and protrudes to the back side, and a first gear 426 is fixed to the tip of the protruded drive shaft 425a. The first gear 426 is engaged with a second gear 427 that is pivotable about a pivot shaft 430 that projects from the back surface of the base member 401A.

  A connecting piece 428 extends from a predetermined position on the rear peripheral edge of the second gear 427 in a direction away from the center of rotation, and the back of the connecting piece 428 is connected to connect to the first movable base 410A. A shaft 429 protrudes toward the rear side. The connecting shaft 429 is slidably inserted into a long hole 424 formed on the right side of the bearing hole 421 in the first movable base 410A. Therefore, the drive shaft 425a of the second effect motor 425 rotates and the connection shaft 429 of the connection piece 428 rotates via the first gear 426 and the second gear 427, so that the first movable base 410A rotates. It rotates around the shaft 420.

  A connecting shaft 431 for transmitting power to the second movable base 410B protrudes forward from the left end of the first movable base 410A. Further, a second position sensor 432 is provided in the vicinity of the rotation shaft 420 on the back surface of the base member 401A, and a detection unit (not shown) provided at a predetermined position of the first movable base 410A is detected. In the present embodiment, a detection unit (not shown) is detected by the second position sensor 432 when the first movable unit 402A is in the second standby position.

  As shown in FIG. 14B in particular, the second movable base 410B has an arc-shaped connecting groove 440 that is inclined slightly downward from the left to the right and extends in the left-right direction. In 440, the connecting shaft 431 of the first movable base 410A is slidably inserted. In addition, a connecting shaft 441 for transmitting power to the third movable base 410C projects forward from a position below the right end of the connecting groove 440.

  A guide portion 445 for connecting to the base member 401A is provided below the connecting groove 440 in the second movable base 410B. Specifically, a fixed rail 442 that faces in the vertical direction is fixed to the front surface of the base member 401A, and sliding rails 443A and 443B are attached to the fixed rail 442 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. On the right side of the slide rail 443A, a vertical guide bar 444 is provided, and the guide portion 445 is inserted into the guide bar 444 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

  That is, in the second movable base 410B, the sliding rails 443A and 443B move in the vertical direction with respect to the fixed rail 442, and the guide portion 445 moves in the vertical direction with respect to the guide rod 444, whereby the back surface of the decorative member 401B. The base member 401A is guided to move vertically between a lower position (see FIG. 14 (A)) concealed by the base member and an upper position (see FIG. 15 (B)) above the lower position. It has become.

  In the third movable base 410C, a bearing hole 451 into which a rotation shaft 450 protruding from the left side of the front surface of the base member 401A is inserted is formed at the left end, and the rotation shaft 450 inserted into the bearing hole 451 is provided. As a center, it is pivotally supported between a horizontal position (see FIG. 14A) facing in the left-right direction and an inclined position (see FIG. 15B) inclined obliquely upward to the right. A guide piece 452 extends from the left end of the third movable base 410C in a direction away from the center of rotation, and a guide shaft 453 projects from the back surface of the guide piece 452. The guide shaft 453 is slidably inserted into a guide groove 454 formed in an arc shape around the rotation shaft 450 in the base member 401A, thereby defining a rotation range of the third movable base 410C.

  Further, the third movable base 410C is formed with an arc-shaped connection groove 455 that is inclined downward from the right end portion toward the center portion. The connection groove 455 has a connection shaft 441 of the second movable base 410B. Is slidably inserted.

  As described above, the connecting shaft 431 of the first movable base 410A is slidably inserted into the connecting groove 440 of the second movable base 410B, whereby the first movable base 410A and the second movable base 410B are connected, The connecting shaft 441 of the second movable base 410B is slidably inserted into the connecting groove 455 of the third movable base 410C, so that the second movable base 410B and the third movable base 410C are connected. That is, the first movable base 410A and the third movable base 410C are connected via the second movable base 410B.

  Next, operation modes of the first movable base 410A, the second movable base 410B, and the third movable base 410C constituting the second movable body 402 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 14A, when the second movable body 402 is in the second standby position, the first movable base 410A and the third movable base 410C are in the horizontal position, and the second movable base 410B is in the lower position. is there. Specifically, the rotation shaft 420 of the first movable base 410A and the rotation shaft 450 of the third movable base 410C are arranged apart from each other in the left and right directions, and one of the first movable base 410A and the third movable base 410C. Is arranged so as to tilt toward the other rotation axis. At this time, the connecting shaft 431 is disposed at the left end portion of the connecting groove 440, and the connecting shaft 441 is disposed at the left end portion of the connecting groove 455. The guide portion 445 is disposed below the guide bar 444, and the slide rails 443A and 443B are also disposed on the front surface of the fixed rail 442.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 14B, the drive shaft 425a of the second effect motor 425 rotates, and the connecting shaft 429 of the connecting piece 428 is viewed from the front via the first gear 426 and the second gear 427. By rotating around, the first movable base 410A rotates around the rotation shaft 420 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Then, when the connecting shaft 431 moves upward in accordance with the rotation of the first movable base 410A, the connecting shaft 431 slides to the right while pushing up the connecting groove 440, so that the second movable base 410B rises. The second movable base 410 </ b> B moves substantially vertically upward by the guide portion 445 being moved and guided by the guide rod 444.

  Then, as the second movable base 410B moves upward, the connecting shaft 441 moves upward so that the connecting shaft 441 slides upward while pushing up the connecting groove 455, so that the third movable base 410C is counterclockwise as viewed from the front. Rotate around. That is, the second movable base 410B and the third movable base 410C are interlocked according to the rotation of the first movable base 410A.

  Next, when the guide portion 445 reaches the upper end of the guide rod 444, the slide rails 443A and 443B slide upward relative to the fixed rail 442 as shown in FIG. Is guided upward.

  15B, when the connecting shaft 431 reaches the right end of the connecting groove 440 and the connecting shaft 441 reaches the upper end of the connecting groove 455, the first movable base 410A and the third movable base The base 410C is disposed at an inclined position, and the second movable base 410B is disposed at an upper position. Thus, in a state where the second movable body 402 has moved to the second advanced position, the tip of the first movable base 410A and the tip of the third movable base 410C are close to each other so as to form a substantially inverted V shape when viewed from the front. Is done.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15B, in the state where the second movable body 402 is in the second advanced position, the first movable base 410A is moved to the front by rotating the drive shaft 425a of the second effect motor 425 in the reverse direction. The second movable base 410B is lowered in response to the counterclockwise rotation, so that the third movable base 410C is rotated clockwise in the front view. The first movable base 410A and the third movable base 410C are arranged at the horizontal position, and the second movable base 410B is arranged at the lower position, so that the second movable body 402 is arranged at the second standby position.

  Next, the first effect unit 411A, the second effect units 411B and 411D, and the third effect unit 411C will be described.

  The first effect unit 411A, the second effect units 411B, 411D, and the third effect unit 411C are each made of a non-transparent effect member with decorations on the front surface, and are moved from the second standby position to the second advance position. Are moved separately, and united when moved to the second advance position to form a predetermined form (for example, see FIG. 17). Thus, although the 1st production part 411A, the 2nd production parts 411B and 411D, and the 3rd production part 411C which constitute the 2nd movable body 402 are parts attracting attention by a player, these 1st production parts 411A. In addition, a moving mechanism unit is required for moving the second effect units 411B and 411D and the third effect unit 411C between the second standby position and a second advance position different from the second standby position.

  The movement mechanism unit is a mechanism unit that is necessary for operating the first effect unit 411A, the second effect units 411B, 411D, and the third effect unit 411C in a predetermined manner. For example, the first effect unit 411A, It includes a first movable base 410A, a second movable base 410B, and a third movable base 410C that operably support the second rendering units 411B and 411D and the third rendering unit 411C. More specifically, a connecting shaft 431 formed on the first movable base 410A, a connecting groove 440 formed on the second movable base 410B, a connecting shaft 441, a connecting groove 455 formed on the third movable base 410C, etc. It includes a connecting portion that connects each movable base, a power transmission portion (for example, a gear portion) that transmits the power of the second effect motor 425 to other members, and the like.

  These moving mechanism units are formed to operate the first effect unit 411A, the second effect units 411B and 411D, and the third effect unit 411C in a predetermined manner. The first effect unit 411A and the second effect unit 411C are formed. Compared to the parts 411B and 411D and the third effect part 411C, the appearance is poor. Therefore, the first rendering unit 411A, the second rendering unit 411B, 411D, and the third rendering are performed so that the beauty of the first rendering unit 411A, the second rendering unit 411B, 411D, and the third rendering unit 411C is not impaired. The part 411C covers the front surfaces of the first movable base 410A, the second movable base 410B, and the third movable base 410C.

  However, as shown in FIG. 11A and FIG. 12, the second rendering portions 411B and 411D cover the substantially right portion of the front surface of the second movable base 410B, but the left mechanism portion E (FIG. 11). (A) (see white area in FIG. 17) is not covered. That is, the mechanism portion E is a mechanism unit that is necessary for operating the first effect unit 411A, the second effect units 411B, 411D, and the third effect unit 411C, but the first effect unit is in the second advanced position. When 411A, 2nd effect part 411B, 411D, and 3rd effect part 411C become a predetermined form, it becomes an unnecessary site | part.

  FIGS. 16A, 16B, and 17 show the first effect unit 411A, the second effect units 411B, 411D, and the third effect when the second movable body 402 moves from the second standby position to the second advance position. The operation mode of the production section 411C is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, when the second movable body 402 is in the second standby position, the first effect unit 411A, the second effect units 411B and 411D, and the third effect unit 411C are decorated on the base body 401. The front side is covered with a member 401B (part indicated by hatching in the figure) and the like, making it difficult for the player to see. As shown in FIG. 16B, when the second movable body 402 starts to move from the second standby position to the second advance position, each of the first effect units 411A, the second effect units 411B, 411D, and the third effect. A portion of the part 411C that has moved above the base body 401 is visible to the player.

  Here, the second effect unit 411D will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 18 (A), the second effect unit 411D can be rotated between the tilted position and the standing position via the rotation shaft 460 facing in the front-rear direction on the front side of the second effect unit 411B. Is pivotally supported. A rotation member 461 that rotates about the rotation shaft 460 is integrally fixed to the back surface of the second effect section 411D, and a connecting shaft 462 is provided on the periphery of the rotation member 461. Yes.

  On the other hand, in the second effect part 411B, a slide plate 463 is provided so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and is inserted into a connecting long hole 464 formed at the upper end of the slide plate 463. The slide plate 463 is always biased downward by a torsion spring 465 mounted around the rotation shaft 460. When the second movable body 402 is located at the second standby position, FIG. As shown to (A), a lower end is arrange | positioned in an upper position by contact | abutting to the predetermined location of base member 401A. Further, when the second movable body 402 moves upward from the second standby position toward the second advance position, the lower end moves away from the predetermined position of the base member 401A as shown in FIG. Is urged downward and moved to a lower position.

  Accordingly, since the connecting shaft 462 rotates downward, the second rendering unit 411D tilts immediately after the second movable body 402 starts moving from the second standby position to the second advance position. It moves from the position to the standing position (see FIG. 16B). Although not particularly illustrated, when the second movable body 402 moves from the second advanced position to the second standby position, the lower end of the slide plate 463 comes into contact with a predetermined position of the base member 401A and resists the urging force of the torsion spring 465. Therefore, the second effect unit 411D moves from the standing position to the tilted position immediately before the second movable body 402 returns to the second standby position.

  As shown in FIG. 16B, when the second movable body 402 starts moving from the second standby position to the second advanced position and the second movable base 410B moves up, the mechanism portion E in the second movable base 410B. Becomes visible from the player. And as shown in FIG. 17, when the 2nd movable body 402 stops in a 2nd advance position, the mechanism part E in the 2nd movable base 410B becomes visible from a player.

  As described above, when the first effect unit 411A, the second effect units 411B and 411D, and the third effect unit 411C are in the predetermined form shown in FIG. 17 at the second advanced position, the mechanism portion E of the second movable base 410B is Since it is an unnecessary part, the second effect part 411B cannot be expanded to cover the mechanism part E. However, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16B, the second movable body 402 moves from the second standby position to the second advanced position, or as shown in FIG. When the body 402 is stopped at the second advanced position, the mechanism portion E of the second movable base 410B is visible to the player. In other words, the mechanism portion E is a visually recognizable portion that is visible to the player when the second movable body 402 is moving from the second standby position to the second advanced position or stopped at the second advanced position. It is said that.

  Thus, when the second movable body 402 moves from the second standby position to the second advanced position or stops at the second advanced position, the mechanism portion E of the second movable base 410B is the player. In this embodiment, the second movable base is utilized using the first movable bodies 302L and 302R of the first rendering unit 300, as will be described below. It is made difficult for the player to visually recognize the mechanism portion E of 410B.

  Next, the light guide plate device 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19A is a front view showing the light guide plate device, and FIG. 19B is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 20A is an enlarged front view showing the main part of the light guide plate device, FIG. 20B is a sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 20A, and FIG. 20C is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. . FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the moving region of each movable body and the light guide plate device. Here, in order to help understanding, a light emitting area 506 described later is indicated by dots (halftone dots), and a non-light emitting area 507 having no dots (halftone dots) is indicated by white.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the light guide plate device 500 includes a light guide plate 501 provided so as to close the opening 2c of the game board 2, and a light guide for making light incident on the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501. An LED substrate 503 on which a plurality of light plate LEDs 502 are mounted, a condenser lens 504 for condensing light from the light guide plate LED 502 toward the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, and the light guide plate 501 and the LED substrate 503 are integrated. And a frame member 505 for the purpose. The light guide plate device 500 may be fixed to the back surface of the game board 2 or may be fixed to the center decorative frame 51.

  The light guide plate 501 is a plate member made of a material such as transparent synthetic resin such as acrylic or polycarbonate having a predetermined front-rear width dimension (plate thickness = about 5 mm), as shown in FIG. The effect display device 5, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R, and the second movable body 402 are disposed in front of each other.

  In addition, the light guide plate 501 is a light emitting region 506 as a first region that forms a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits the light from the front surface. , A light emitting region that emits light by light incident inside from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501 (see the halftone dot region in FIG. 19A and FIG. 20A), and incident from the right end surface 501a. A non-light emitting region 507 as a second region that does not form a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 forward and emits it from the front surface, that is, non-light emitting by light incident on the inside of the light guide plate 501. And a light emitting region (see the white region in FIGS. 19A and 20A).

  The light emitting region 506 is formed so that a radial figure appears at a substantially central position of the light guide plate 501. When light enters the light guide plate 501, the light emitting region 506 reflects the light and emits it forward. As a result, a predetermined image is emitted and displayed on the light guide plate 501.

  The non-light emitting region 507 includes a circular non-light emitting portion 507A provided at the center of the light emitting region 506 and a plurality of non-light emitting portions 507A provided on the left and right sides of the non-light emitting portion 507A in the light emitting region 506 and having a smaller diameter than the non-light emitting portion 507A. A light emitting portion 507B, a non-light emitting portion 507C that is provided above the non-light emitting portion 507A in the light emitting region 506 and has a smaller diameter than the non light emitting portion 507A, and a diagonally lower right side of the non light emitting portion 507A in the light emitting region 506 A plurality of non-light-emitting portions 507D that are arranged and have a smaller diameter than the non-light-emitting portions 507A, and a plurality of non-light-emitting portions 507A that are arranged obliquely to the left of the non-light-emitting portions 507A in the light-emitting region 506 and have a smaller diameter than the non-light-emitting portions 507A Non-light-emitting portion 507E and a plurality of non-light-emitting portions 507F provided on the outer edge (outside the light-emitting region 506) of the light guide plate 501. Light inside the plate 501 is an area no to be light emitting display even when the incident. In particular, the non-light emitting portions 507A to 507E are regions surrounded by the light emitting region 506.

  As shown in FIG. 20C, the light emitting region 506 has a fine uneven state (rough surface) so as to guide the incident light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a to be emitted from the front surface. It is formed on the back side. Specifically, the light emitting region 506 is formed in a concavo-convex state (rough surface) having a substantially semicircular shape with a constant pitch in a sectional view when the traveling direction of light is viewed from the side. In FIG. 20C, in order to help understanding, the uneven state (rough surface) is illustrated in an enlarged manner, but the actual light emitting region 506 is a fine unevenness having a size that is difficult to see with the naked eye. It is in a state.

  When light is incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, a predetermined image (still image) is displayed on the light guide plate 501 by a dot pattern including a plurality of concave portions 510 formed in the light emitting region 506 (FIG. (See the halftone dot area in 19 (A)). That is, the light emitting region 506 as a first region that forms a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 that is incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits the light from the front surface is formed from the plurality of recesses 510. This is a region where a dot pattern is formed, and is a non-second region that does not form a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and exits from the front surface. The light emitting region 507 is a region where a dot pattern composed of a plurality of recesses 510 is not formed. Further, in the present embodiment, a predetermined image (figure) is exemplified as display information that can be displayed by the light guide plate 501, but in addition to these, decoration such as a picture, a character, a symbol, a pattern, or a pattern is also possible. Other display information may be displayed.

  In the light guide plate 501, when light is not incident from the right end surface 501 a, the entire light guide plate 501 including the light emitting region 506 is colorless and transparent, and the display image of the rear effect display device 5, the first The movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 can be viewed (transparent) from the front of the light guide plate 501. In a state where light is incident from the right end surface 501a, the light emitting region 506 emits light, but the portions other than the light emitting region 506 are maintained in a colorless and transparent state.

  In the present embodiment, the light emitting region 506 is formed in a substantially semi-circular uneven shape. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the light emitting region 506 is formed by a stamper or injection with a light guide plate. You may comprise by the shaping | molding system which attaches an uneven | corrugated | grooved part to the back surface (rear surface) of 501. FIG. In addition, the reflective part is configured by a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed with white ink on an acrylic plate, an adhesive dot method in which an acrylic plate and a reflective plate are attached with a dot-like adhesive, or a groove processing method. May be.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the shape of each unevenness | corrugation of the light emission area | region 506 in the back surface (rear surface) of the light-guide plate 501 is a substantially semicircle shape by sectional view, this invention is not limited to this, The light emitting region 506 can be variously modified as long as it forms a reflective surface capable of reflecting light toward the front surface (front surface), such as a substantially triangular cross section.

  The condensing lens 504 is formed in a long plate shape extending in the vertical direction by a translucent member such as acrylic or polycarbonate. On the surface of the condensing lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side, a plurality of semicircular convex portions 504A bulging toward the light guide plate 501 in front view are formed continuously in the vertical direction. The condenser lens 504 is composed of a single member in which a plurality of convex portions 504A are integrally provided. Each convex portion 504A is formed one by one corresponding to each of the light guide plates LED502.

  Note that the convex portions 504A are not limited to one-to-one correspondence with the light guide plates LED502, and, for example, one convex portion 504A may correspond to two or more light guide plate LEDs 502. The condensing lens 504 is not limited to a single member integrally provided with a plurality of convex portions 504A, but includes a plurality of condensing lenses formed separately corresponding to the light guide plate LED 502. It may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 20C, the front-rear width of the condensing lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side is smaller than the front-rear width of the condensing lens 504 on the light guide plate LED 502 side. Further, the front-rear width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side is substantially the same as the front-rear width of the light receiving surface of the light guide plate 501, so that the emitted light from the condenser lens 504 is diffused in the front-rear direction. Without incident (without light leakage).

  The front surface of the condensing lens 504 is a flat inclined surface that gradually inclines from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side, and the rear surface of the condensing lens 504 extends from the light guide plate LED 502 side to the light guide plate. A flat inclined surface is gradually inclined toward the front side toward the 501 side. That is, the condensing lens 504 is formed in a tapered shape in which the plate thickness gradually decreases from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side.

  In addition, a slight gap is provided between the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501. For example, the gap is of such a size that the condensing lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 do not come into contact with each other even when vibration occurs during the transportation and use of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the condensing lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 from being damaged by vibrations generated during transportation and use of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Next, the light guide state of the emitted light from the light guide plate LED 502 will be described. The emitted light emitted from each light guide plate LED 502 is incident on the condenser lens 504. Here, since the incident surface of the condensing lens 504 is formed in a curved shape so as to form a lens surface, even if the directivity of the emitted light from the light guide plate LED 502 is high, it enters the condensing lens 504. The light to be diffused radially in the left-right direction within the condenser lens 504. The light incident on the condenser lens 504 is refracted and emitted in the right direction when passing through the inner curved lens surface.

  Thereby, even if the directivity of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 is high, the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 can be diffused radially to some extent by the condenser lens 504, and the light emitting region in the light guide plate 501 Can be expanded. Moreover, since the emitted light from the condensing lens 504 is guided in the horizontal direction (because it is suppressed from spreading radially), only the portion corresponding to each light guide plate LED 502 can emit light.

  Further, the light incident on the condenser lens 504 from the light guide plate LED 502 is condensed toward a substantially central position in the front-rear direction while repeating total reflection in the front-rear direction, and finally the light guide plate of the condenser lens 504. The light is emitted from the end surface on the 501 side (the portion with the smallest front-rear width).

  With such a configuration, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be condensed without being diffused in the front-rear direction and guided to the light guide plate 501. In particular, even when the front-rear width of the light emitting surface of the light guide plate LED 502 is larger than the front-rear width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate LED 502 side, the light guide plate LED 502 is not diffused in the front-rear direction without diffusing light. Therefore, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be prevented from diffusing to the surroundings.

  Although not particularly illustrated, for example, even when a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 502 are arranged in the front-rear direction, the front-rear width of the light guide plate LED 502 of the condenser lens 504 is increased according to the front-rear width of the light guide plate LED 502. Thus, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be incident on the condenser lens 504 without diffusing in the front-rear direction. Therefore, even if the front-rear width of the light emitting area of the light guide plate LED 502 is larger than the front-rear width of the light guide plate 501, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 is collected without being diffused in the front-rear direction and is collected on the light guide plate 501. Can lead.

  When light from the condensing lens 504 is guided into the light guide plate 501 and reaches the light emitting area 506, the light is reflected toward the front side (player side) in the light emitting area 506. Accordingly, when viewed from the player, the light emitting area 506 of the light guide plate 501 emits light by reflected light, so that a figure represented by a halftone dot in FIG. 19A is displayed on the front surface of the light guide plate 501. It becomes like this. Note that a portion of the light guide plate 501 corresponding to the light emitting region 506 is emitted by reflected light, so that images such as predetermined characters and figures may be displayed on the light guide plate 501.

  As shown in FIG. 19B, when viewed from the player (in the front-rear direction), the effect display device 5 is arranged at the back and the light guide plate device 500 is arranged at the front. As seen from the player, the effect display device 5 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. For example, the effect display device 5 uses a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal panel. For example, as a liquid crystal panel, a twisted nematic mode (TN mode), an in-plane switching mode (IPS mode), a vertical alignment mode (VA mode), a ferroelectric liquid crystal mode, an antiferroelectric liquid crystal mode, a homogeneous liquid crystal mode, Various modes of liquid crystal panels such as a guest-host liquid crystal mode, a polymer dispersed liquid crystal mode, and a holographic polymer dispersed liquid crystal mode may be used. The effect display device 5 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and an EL display device such as an organic EL display device or an inorganic EL display device may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the light emitting area 506 includes a moving area E1 of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R that operate on the back side of the light guide plate 501, a moving area E2 of the second movable body 402, and the effect display device 5. The display area is formed so as to overlap the front and rear with respect to most of the display area. The moving areas E1 and E2 are hatched areas surrounded by a one-dot chain line in FIG.

  Specifically, the movement area E1 of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R is an area until the first movable bodies 302L and 302R move from the first standby position to the first advanced position, and the movement area of the second movable body 402. E2 is an area until the second movable body 402 moves from the second standby position to the second advance position, and includes an area including the first standby position, the first advance position, the second standby position, and the second advance position. is there. When light is incident from the right end surface 501a, the light guide plate 501 is in a state in which the light emitting area 506 emits light, and the display image of the rear effect display device 5, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R, and the second movable body 402 are displayed. It is difficult or impossible to see (perspective) from the front of the light guide plate 501. That is, when the light emitting region 506 emits light, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 can be visually recognized from the front of the light guide plate 501 regardless of whether the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are in a moving operation or when the operation is completed. (Fluoroscopy) Difficult or invisible.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21, when the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are positioned at the first advanced position, the plurality of movable body LEDs 307L and 307R of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are connected to the light guide plate 501. On the back surface, the non-light emitting region 507 is disposed at a position corresponding to the plurality of non-light emitting portions 507B. In addition, when the second movable body 402 is positioned at the second advance position, the plurality of movable body LEDs 407A of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are disposed on the back surface of the light guide plate 501 in the non-light emitting region 507. A plurality of movable body LEDs 407B are disposed at positions corresponding to the light emitting section 507D, a plurality of movable body LEDs 407C are disposed at positions corresponding to the non-light emitting section 507E, and movable. Body LED407D is arrange | positioned in the position corresponding to the non-light-emitting part 507C. That is, when the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are positioned at the first advanced position and the second movable body 402 is positioned at the second advanced position, the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D are not light-emitting portions 507A to 507A. It becomes visible from the front through 507E (see FIGS. 28 and 29).

  Note that the display image of the effect display device 5 is disposed so as to partially overlap the movement area E1 of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the movement area E2 of the second movable body 402.

  Next, the composite effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 22A is a movable body movement mode determination table, FIG. 22B is a light guide plate light emission mode determination table, FIG. 22C is a movable body LED light emission mode determination table, and FIG. 22D is an effect display device display mode determination table. It is explanatory drawing shown. FIGS. 23A and 23B are explanatory diagrams showing a mode of the combined effect pattern 1 and FIG. 23B a mode of the combined effect pattern 2. FIG. 24A is an explanatory diagram showing an aspect of the combined effect pattern 3 and FIG. 24B is an explanatory diagram showing an aspect of the combined effect pattern 4. 25A is an explanatory diagram showing a state before the combined effect, FIG. 25B is an explanatory diagram of the light guide plate in the state of (A), and FIG. 25C is an explanatory diagram of the effect display device in the state of (A). (D) is explanatory drawing of the 1st movable body in the state of (A), and a 2nd movable body. 26A is an explanatory diagram showing a state at the start of the light emission effect of the light guide plate in the combined effect pattern 1, FIG. 26B is an explanatory diagram of the light guide plate in the state of FIG. 26A, and FIG. (D) is an explanatory view of the first movable body and the second movable body in the state (A). 27A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state at the start of operation of the first movable body and the second movable body in the pattern 1 of the composite effect, and FIG. 27B is an explanatory diagram of the light guide plate in the state of FIG. (C) is explanatory drawing of the production | presentation display apparatus in the state of (A), (D) is explanatory drawing of the 1st movable body and 2nd movable body in the state of (A). 28A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state when the first movable body and the second movable body are completed in the combined effect pattern 1, and FIG. 28B is an explanatory diagram of the light guide plate in the state of FIG. (C) is explanatory drawing of the production | presentation display apparatus in the state of (A), (D) is explanatory drawing of the 1st movable body and 2nd movable body in the state of (A). FIGS. 29A and 29B are explanatory views showing the state of the movable body LED in the combined effect pattern 1 during the light emission effect, FIG. 29B is an explanatory view of the light guide plate in the state of FIG. 29A, and FIG. (D) is an explanatory view of the first movable body and the second movable body in the state (A). 30A is an explanatory diagram showing the state of the display effect of the effect display device in the combined effect pattern 1, FIG. 30B is an explanatory diagram of the light guide plate in the state of FIG. 30A, and FIG. (D) is an explanatory view of the first movable body and the second movable body in the state (A). FIGS. 31A and 31B are explanatory diagrams showing a state at the time of light emission effect of the light guide plate in the combined effect pattern 3, and FIG. 31B is an explanatory diagram showing a state at the time of display effect of the effect display device in the combined effect pattern 3 It is. FIGS. 32A and 32B are explanatory views showing a modification of the pattern 2 of the combined effect. 26 to 32, in order to help understanding, in the central portion of the game board 2, a bright portion viewed from the player is shown in white, and a dark portion viewed from the player is indicated by a dot (halftone dot). Show.

  In the present embodiment, an example of an effect executed by the effect control CPU 120 when the change pattern specified from the change pattern designation command received from the game control microcomputer 100 is a super reach change pattern will be described. The effects referred to here are the operation effects of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, the light guide plate effects (light emission effects) by the light guide plate device 500, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402. It is a composite effect including an effect by each movable body LED provided in and a display effect by the effect display device 5.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the composite effect based on the fact that the change pattern designation command (super reach change pattern) is received from the game control microcomputer 100, and the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second An effect mode such as an operation effect of the movable body 402, a light guide plate effect by the light guide plate device 500, an effect by the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, and 407A to 407D and a display effect by the effect display device 5 is determined. Start changing the design symbols. In the present embodiment, the combined effect is executed at a rate of 100% regardless of whether the variation pattern designation command received from the game control microcomputer 100 is a variation pattern per super reach or a variation pattern out of super reach. Although it is determined, the presence or absence of execution may be determined.

  Specifically, the ROM 121 included in the effect control board 12 includes, for example, a movable body movement mode determination table illustrated in FIG. 22A, a light guide plate light emission mode determination table illustrated in FIG. 22B, and FIG. A movable body LED light emission mode determination table, an effect display device display mode determination table shown in FIG. 22D, and the like are stored.

  The movable body movement mode determination table is a table for determining the movement modes of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 in the combined performance.

  Specifically, the movable body movement mode determination table stops at the first standby position and the second standby position without moving the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 to the first advanced position and the second advanced position. There are a stop pattern that is left as it is, and a movement pattern that moves the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 to the first advanced position and the second advanced position. When the stop pattern is determined, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body are moved even when the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 start moving in the movement pattern. An image in which the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are moved to the first advanced position and the second advanced position by the effect display device 5 while the 402 is kept stopped at the first standby position and the second standby position. An effect of displaying only P is performed (see FIG. 31B).

  In addition, although the movable body movement mode determination table of this embodiment demonstrates the example which has the movement mode only of a stop pattern and a movement pattern, this invention is not limited to this, A plurality of movement modes are provided. Also good. For example, a first movement pattern for moving the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 to the first advanced position and the second advanced position, and the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 as the first , A second movement pattern for moving to a position between the second standby position and the first and second advance positions may be provided.

  These stop patterns and movement patterns are determined in accordance with the display results of the variation display specified by the variation pattern designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 (displacement, non-probable large hit, probable big hit) in the movable body moving mode determination table. The percentage determined is different.

  Specifically, in the case of a deviation, the stop pattern is determined as a movement mode at a rate of 80%, and the movement pattern is determined at a rate of 20%. In the case of non-probable big hit, the stop pattern is determined as a movement mode at a rate of 20%, the movement pattern is decided in a rate of 80%, and in the case of probable big hit, the stop pattern is determined at a rate of 10%. The movement mode is determined, and the movement pattern is determined at a rate of 90%. That is, in the case of a loss, the stop pattern is determined at a higher rate than the movement pattern, and in the case of a big hit, the movement pattern is determined at a higher rate than the stop pattern. In other words, in the movable body moving mode, the movement pattern has a higher degree of expectation for the big hit than the stop pattern. In the case of non-probable big hit, the stop pattern is determined at a higher rate than the moving pattern, and in the case of probable big hit, the moving pattern is determined at a higher rate than the stop pattern. In other words, the movement pattern has a higher expectation for the probable big hit than the stop pattern.

  Then, the light-guide plate light emission mode determination table is demonstrated. The light guide plate light emission mode determination table is a table for determining the light emission mode of the light guide plate device 500 in the combined effect.

  Specifically, the light guide plate light emission mode determination table includes a white pattern that causes the light guide plate 501 to emit white light, a red pattern that causes the light guide plate 501 to emit red light, and a flash pattern that causes the light guide plate 501 to blink. As will be described later, this light guide plate light emission mode is a period row from before the movement of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 (before the start of the movement pattern in the movable body movement mode determination table) to after the end of the movement. (See FIGS. 23A and 23B). When the stop pattern is determined in the movable body movement mode determination table, the display is performed for a predetermined period after the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are displayed by the effect display device 5 (FIG. 24A). )reference).

  In addition, although the light guide plate light emission mode determination table of this embodiment demonstrates the example which has a white pattern, a red pattern, and a flash pattern, this invention is not limited to this, There are multiple light emission modes. That's fine. For example, the light emission mode may have a blue pattern, a green pattern, a purple pattern, a rainbow pattern, or the like. Moreover, although the flash pattern of the present embodiment is described as a mode in which the light guide plate 501 flashes in red, the present invention is not limited to this, and the light may be emitted in other colors.

  These white pattern, red pattern, and flash pattern are the display results of the variation display specified from the variation pattern designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 in the light guide plate light emission mode determination table (disconnected, non-probable variation big hit, probability variation big hit) The ratio determined according to the is different.

  Specifically, in the case of dislocation, the white pattern is determined as a light emission mode at a rate of 80%, the red pattern is determined at a rate of 18%, and the flash pattern is determined at a rate of 2%. In the case of a non-probable big hit, the white pattern is determined as a light emission mode at a rate of 20%, the red pattern is determined at a rate of 60%, and the flash pattern is determined at a rate of 20%. In the case of a probable big hit, the white pattern is determined as a light emission mode at a rate of 2%, the red pattern is determined at a rate of 18%, and the flash pattern is determined at a rate of 80%.

  That is, in the case of detachment, the white pattern is determined at a higher rate than the red pattern and the flash pattern, and in the case of big hit, the red pattern and the flash pattern are determined at a higher rate than the white pattern. . In other words, as for the light emission mode, the red pattern and the flash pattern have a higher expectation level for the big hit than the white pattern.

  In the case of non-probable big hit, the red pattern is determined at a higher rate than the flash pattern, and in the case of probable big hit, the flash pattern is determined at a higher rate than the red pattern. In other words, the flash pattern has a higher expectation for the probable big hit than the red pattern.

  Next, the movable body LED light emission mode determination table will be described. The movable body LED light emission mode determination table is a table for determining the light emission modes of the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, and 407A to 407D in the combined performance. The movable body LED light emission mode determination table is a table used only when the movement pattern is determined using the above-described movable body movement mode determination table. When the stop pattern is determined, the movable body LED 307L, 307R and 407A to 407D are not used because they do not emit light.

  Specifically, the movable body LED light emission mode determination table includes a white pattern that causes the movable bodies LEDs 307L, 307R, and 407A to 407D to emit light in white, a red pattern that causes the movable bodies LEDs 307L, 307R, and 407A to 407D to emit light in red, and a movable body. And a flash pattern that causes the LEDs 307L, 307R, and 407A to 407D to blink. These movable body LED light emission modes are appropriately determined from a white pattern, a red pattern, and a flash pattern when the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are determined as movement patterns in the movable body movement mode determination table. Is done. As described later, the movable body LED light emission mode is performed for a predetermined period when the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are moved to the first advanced position and the second advanced position (after the movement is completed). (See FIGS. 23A and 23B).

  In addition, although the movable body LED light emission mode determination table of this embodiment demonstrates the example which has a white pattern, a red pattern, and a flash pattern, this invention is not limited to this, There are multiple light emission modes. Just do it. For example, the light emission mode may have a blue pattern, a green pattern, a purple pattern, a rainbow pattern, or the like.

  The white pattern, the red pattern, and the flash pattern in the movable body LED light emission mode determination table are the display results of the variation display specified from the variation pattern designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 in the movable body LED light emission mode determination table ( The ratio determined in accordance with the difference, non-probable big hit, and probable big hit is different.

  Specifically, in the case of dislocation, the white pattern is determined as a light emission mode at a rate of 80%, the red pattern is determined at a rate of 18%, and the flash pattern is determined at a rate of 2%. In the case of a non-probable big hit, the white pattern is determined as a light emission mode at a rate of 20%, the red pattern is determined at a rate of 60%, and the flash pattern is determined at a rate of 20%. In the case of a probable big hit, the white pattern is determined as a light emission mode at a rate of 2%, the red pattern is determined at a rate of 18%, and the flash pattern is determined at a rate of 80%.

  That is, in the case of detachment, the white pattern is determined at a higher rate than the red pattern and the flash pattern, and in the case of big hit, the red pattern and the flash pattern are determined at a higher rate than the white pattern. . In other words, as for the light emission mode, the red pattern and the flash pattern have a higher expectation level for the big hit than the white pattern.

  In the case of non-probable big hit, the red pattern is determined at a higher rate than the flash pattern, and in the case of probable big hit, the flash pattern is determined at a higher rate than the red pattern. In other words, the flash pattern has a higher expectation for the probable big hit than the red pattern.

  Next, the effect display device display mode determination table will be described. The effect display device display mode determination table is a table for determining the display mode of the effect display device 5 in the combined effect.

  Specifically, the effect display device display mode determination table includes an effectless pattern in which the effect image is not displayed by the effect display device 5, an effect A pattern in which the effect image is displayed in white by the effect display device 5, and the effect display device 5. And an effect B pattern for displaying the effect image in red. As described later, these effect display device display modes are performed for a predetermined period when the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 or their images move to the first advance position (after the movement ends) (see FIG. 23 (A), (B) and FIG. 24 (B)).

  In addition, although the effect display apparatus display mode determination table of this embodiment demonstrates the example which has a pattern without an effect, an effect A pattern, and an effect B pattern, this invention is not limited to this, A display mode It is sufficient to have a plurality. For example, the display mode may have a blue pattern, a green pattern, a purple pattern, a rainbow pattern, or the like. In addition, as the display mode, a plurality of patterns having different designs as well as colors may be prepared.

  These effect-less pattern, effect A pattern, and effect B pattern are the display results of the variation display specified by the variation pattern designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 in the effect display device display mode determination table. The ratio determined according to the probability variation big hit and the probability variation big hit is different.

  Specifically, in the case of a loss, the pattern without effect is determined as a display mode at a rate of 80%, the effect A pattern is determined at a rate of 18%, and the effect B pattern is determined at a rate of 2%. . In the case of a non-probable big hit, the effectless pattern is determined as a display mode at a rate of 20%, the effect A pattern is determined at a rate of 60%, and the effect B pattern is determined at a rate of 20%. In the case of a probable big hit, the pattern without effect is determined as a display mode at a rate of 2%, the effect A pattern is determined at a rate of 18%, and the effect B flash pattern is determined at a rate of 80%.

  That is, in the case of a loss, the effect-less pattern is determined at a higher rate than the effect-A pattern and the effect-B pattern, and in the case of a big hit, the effect-A pattern and the effect-B pattern are determined more than the no-effect pattern. Determined at a high rate. In other words, as for the display mode, the effect A pattern and the effect B pattern have a higher expectation level for the big hit than the pattern without an effect.

  In the case of non-probable big hit, the effect A pattern is determined at a higher rate than the effect B pattern, and in the case of probable big hit, the effect B pattern is determined at a higher rate than the effect A pattern. The In other words, the effect B pattern has a higher expectation for the probable big hit than the effect A pattern.

  Next, the flow of an actual composite effect will be described. First, the composite effect pattern 1 which is one form in the case of the big hit shown in FIG. Note that the composite effect pattern 1 is determined as a movement pattern in the movable body movement mode determination table, a red pattern in the light guide plate light emission mode determination table, and a flash pattern in the movable body LED light emission mode determination table. The effect B pattern is determined in the effect display device display mode determination table.

  First, the effect control CPU 120 determines various effect modes based on the reception of the change pattern designation command (super reach change pattern) from the game control microcomputer 100, and then the effect display device 5 displays the effect symbol. Start the variable display. Then, the variation display state of the effect symbol is set to a predetermined reach state at a predetermined timing (see FIG. 25A).

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 25B, the light guide plate 501 is in an unlit state, that is, the entire light guide plate 501 including the light emitting region 506 is colorless without the light emitting region 506 emitting light forward. It is in a transparent state, and the display image of the rear effect display device 5, the first movable bodies 302 </ b> L and 302 </ b> R, and the second movable body 402 can be viewed (perspectively) from the front of the light guide plate 501. In addition, as shown in FIG. 25C, the effect display device 5 performs a variable display (predetermined reach state) of the effect symbols. As shown in FIG. 25D, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are located at the first standby position and the second standby position, and the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, and 407A. ˜407D is turned off.

  Next, although not shown in the drawing, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change display state of the effect symbol to the reach state on the effect display device 5 and starts the reach effect separately from the change display, and then supervises the reach effect. It develops into production (for example, displaying an image in which a character battles). Then, after starting the super reach effect, an operation promotion effect for displaying an image that prompts the user to operate the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed at a predetermined timing (for example, timing when the battle is settled). The effect control CPU 120 receives the operation of the stick controller 31A (or the push button 31B) in the period during which the operation promotion effect is being executed or the operation effective period without receiving the operation of the stick controller 31A (or the push button 31B). When is finished, that is, when the start condition of the composite effect is satisfied, the composite effect pattern 1 (composite effect based on the effect pattern 1) is started.

  In the combined effect pattern 1, the effect control CPU 120 receives an operation of the stick controller 31A (or push button 31B) or operates the stick controller 31A (or push button 31B) during the period of executing the operation promotion effect. When the operation valid period ends without accepting the light, that is, when the combined effect start condition is satisfied Ta1, first, the light guide plate LED 502 is turned on to execute the light guide plate effect (FIGS. 23A and 26A). reference).

  Specifically, in the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501, as shown in FIG. 26B, the light guide plate 501 is turned on, that is, by a dot pattern made up of a plurality of recesses 510 formed in the light emitting region 506. The light is emitted forward and the light emitting area 506 emits light, so that a predetermined image is displayed on the light guide plate 501, whereby the display image of the rear effect display device 5, the first movable body 302 </ b> L, 302R and the 2nd movable body 402 will be in the state which is hard to visually recognize (perspectively) from the front of the light-guide plate 501. FIG. In addition, as shown in FIG. 26C, the effect display device 5 is turned off, that is, the display screen is in a dark display (black display) state when no voltage is applied, and the effect symbol variation display and the image effect are displayed. Then, the effect production is not performed. As shown in FIG. 26D, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are located at the first standby position and the second standby position, and the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, and 407A. ˜407D is turned off.

  Next, the first effect motor 311 and the second effect motor 425 are driven to move the first movable bodies 302L and 302R from the first standby position to the first advance position, and the second movable body 402 from the second standby position to the first position. 2. The advance operation for moving to the advance position is started (see FIGS. 23A, 27A, and 28A).

  Specifically, during the advance operation of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 (the period from the start operation Ta2 to the end of the advance operation Ta3), FIG. As shown in B), the light guide plate 501 continues to be turned on, and the effect display device 5 continues to be turned off as shown in FIGS. 27C and 28C. . As shown in FIGS. 27D and 28D, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 move gradually toward the first advanced position and the second advanced position, The movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D are turned off.

  As shown in FIG. 28A, Ta3 (the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are moved to the first advanced position when the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are advanced). And the second movable LED 307L and 307R of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are disposed at positions corresponding to the non-light emitting portions 507B on the back surface of the light guide plate 501. The plurality of movable body LEDs 407A to 407D of the two movable bodies 402 are arranged at positions corresponding to the plurality of non-light emitting portions 507A, 507C, 507D, and 507E on the back surface of the light guide plate 501.

  As described above, during the advance operation of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 (period from the advance operation start Ta2 to the advance operation end Ta3), a predetermined image (on the light guide plate 501). When the still image is displayed, the light guide plate 501 is disposed in front of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, and thus is emitted from the light guide plate 501 to the front, that is, to the player side. It becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 behind the light guide plate 501 from the player side. That is, since it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the state of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 (whether or not they are moving or the movement mode), the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and 302 It can be made interesting how the state of the second movable body 402 is.

  The mechanism portion E, which is a part of the second movable body 402, is visible to the player when moving from the second standby position toward the second advance position, but is emitted forward from the light guide plate 501. It becomes difficult for the player to see with the light. Further, when the second movable body 402 reaches the second advance position, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are arranged on the left and right sides of the second rendering unit 411B in the second movable body 402. In particular, the first movable body 302L on the left side moves so as to overlap the front side of the mechanism portion E, which is a part of the second movable base 410B, so that the mechanism portion E is concealed by the first movable body 302L and the player Will be invisible.

  In addition, when the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are advanced, the light guide plate 501 is in a lighted state (light emission effect), and the effect display device 5 and the movable body LEDs 307L and 307R. , 407A to 407D are in a light-off state, and synergistically obtains an improvement in the light emission effect of the light guide plate 501 and a decrease in the visibility of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402. It is done.

  Next, the production control CPU 120 executes a light-emitting effect by the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, and 407A to 407D from the end Ta3 when the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are advanced (see FIG. 23A). (See FIG. 29A).

  Specifically, at the start of the light emission effect by the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, and 407A to 407D, as shown in FIG. 29B, the light guide plate 501 continues to be lit, and FIG. As shown in the figure, the effect display device 5 continues to be turned off. Further, as shown in FIG. 29D, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are maintained in the first advanced position and the second advanced position, and the movable body LED 307L. , 307R, 407A to 407D are lit.

  When the light emitting effect by the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D is executed, the light irradiated forward from the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D is a plurality of non-light emission corresponding from the back surface of the light guide plate 501 respectively. The light is emitted to the front side (player side) through the parts 507A to 507E. That is, at this time, not only the light emitting region 506 of the light guide plate 501 emits light due to the light emission effect of the light guide plate 501, but also the non-light emitting portions 507A to 507E of the light guide plate 501 due to the light emission effect of the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D. Light is emitted, and the effect can be enhanced as a composite light emission effect using the light guide plate 501 and the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 ends the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 and performs effect display (display effect) by the effect display device 5 from the end Ta4 of the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 (FIG. 23A and FIG. 23). 30 (A)).

  Specifically, when the effect display by the effect display device 5 is started, the light guide plate 501 is turned off as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 30C, the effect display device 5 is in the effect display state. Further, as shown in FIG. 30D, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are maintained in the first advanced position and the second advanced position, and the movable body LED 307L. , 307R, 407A to 407D are kept in a lit state.

  The effect display is to display an effect image (for example, an image of lightning, a logo, a number, etc.) on the effect display device 5 as a predetermined image. In a region that does not overlap with the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, the player can visually recognize them.

  Thus, by ending the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501, the player can visually recognize the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 positioned at the first advance position and the second advance position. That is, in the period from the time Ta1 when the composite effect start condition is satisfied to the time Ta4 when the light emission effect ends (light emission effect period of the light guide plate 501), the light emitted forward from the light guide plate 501 is the rear of the light guide plate 501. Since the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 were difficult to see from the player, it was difficult for the player to grasp the state of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402. The first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 positioned at the first advanced position and the second advanced position become visible when the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 ends.

  That is, when the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 that should have been in the first standby position and the second standby position when the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 is started, The player suddenly appears at the first advance position and the second advance position, that is, the player does not know that the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 have moved, which may give a surprise to the player. it can.

  Further, when the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 positioned at the first advance position and the second advance position become visible, the first movable body 302L is displayed on the effect display of the effect display device 5. , 302R and the second movable body 402 are made to stand out, so that the production effect of the combined performance is improved.

  The effect control CPU 120 performs the light emission effect by the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D and the effect display by the effect display device 5 for a predetermined period, and then the light emission effect by the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D. And the effect display by the effect display device 5 are terminated. Then, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are moved to the first standby position and the second standby position from Ta5 when the effect display by the effect display apparatus 5 and the light emission effect by the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R and 407A to 407D are completed. The evacuation operation to be evacuated is performed for a predetermined period until the end of the evacuation operation Ta6, and the combined effect is ended.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 aligns predetermined effect symbols in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the effect display device 5 (for example, “7-7-7”) and stops and displays the big hit. Is notified.

  Next, description will be made regarding the pattern 2 of the composite effect which is another form in the case of the big hit shown in FIG. Note that the composite production pattern 2 here is determined as a movement pattern in the movable body movement mode determination table, is determined as a flash pattern in the light guide plate light emission mode determination table, and is determined as a flash pattern in the movable body LED light emission mode determination table. The effect B pattern is determined in the effect display device display mode determination table.

  As shown in FIG. 23B, in the combined effect pattern 2, the light guide plate 501 is extended over the period from the start operation time Tb2 of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 to the end time Tb4 of the light emission effect. The light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 of the flash pattern that is repeatedly turned off and on and blinks is continuously executed. By doing in this way, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 at the time of the advance operation and at the end of the advance operation are in a short time when the light guide plate 501 is turned off in the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 of the flash pattern. It becomes visible. It should be noted that the intervals between turning off and turning on the light guide plate 501 may be set as appropriate. For example, the intervals between turning off and turning on the light guide plate 501 may be different lengths.

  Next, the composite effect pattern 3 which is one form in the case of the detachment shown in FIG. Here, the combined effect pattern 3 is determined as a stop pattern in the movable body movement mode determination table and is determined as a white pattern in the light guide plate light emission mode determination table. In addition, when the stop pattern is determined in the movable body movement mode determination table, the light emission effect of the movable body LED is not performed, and the display effect of the effect display device is not performed. In other words, the movable body LED emission mode determination table does not determine the movable body LED emission mode.

  In the combined effect pattern 3, first, the light guide plate LED 502 is turned on at the time Tc1 when the combined effect start condition is satisfied, and the light guide plate effect is executed (see FIG. 31A). At this time, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 do not actually operate, and stand by at the first standby position and the second standby position. Then, at the end Tc4 of the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501, the effect display device 5 displays the images P of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 in the state of being positioned at the first advanced position and the second advanced position. (See FIG. 31B).

  As described above, patterns 1 to 3 which are examples of composite effects have different expectations for big hits. Specifically, the expectation degree of jackpot of the pattern 1 and the pattern 2 of the composite effect is higher than the expectation degree of jackpot of the pattern 3 of the composite effect. 1 and pattern 3 are higher. Thus, since the degree of jackpot expectation differs depending on the type of composite effect, the player can have an expectation according to the type of composite effect to be executed, so that interest can be improved. Specifically, when the fluctuation display result is a big hit, the movement pattern of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 is determined at a higher rate than the case where the fluctuation display result is lost, and the light guide plate LED 502 is determined. The red LED or flash pattern is determined as the light emission mode of the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, and 407A to 407D, and the effects A and B are determined as the display mode of the effect display device 5, so that the player has a pattern with high expectations. On the other hand, it is possible to expect a big hit even when a stop pattern, a white pattern, or a no-effect pattern with low expectation appear.

  Moreover, there are the following as modifications of the pattern 2 of the composite effect. As shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 23B, the effect display device 5 may perform effect display when the light guide effect of the light guide plate 501 is turned off. In other words, in the light emission effect of the light guide plate 501, the blinking of the light guide plate 501 and the effect display of the effect display device 5 may be repeated.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32A, the effect display on the effect display device 5 is turned off when the light guide plate 501 is turned on in the light emission effect. As a result, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 during the advancing operation are in a state where it is difficult or impossible to see. Also, as shown in FIG. 32B, when the light guide effect of the light guide plate 501 is turned off, the effect display of the effect display device 5 is turned on. Accordingly, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 can be visually recognized during the advance operation. Thus, by repeating blinking of the light guide plate 501 and blinking of the effect display of the effect display device 5, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 that move forward are instantaneously and continuously difficult to see. Or the effect which repeats the state which cannot be visually recognized and the state which can be visually recognized can be performed, and the range of a composite effect spreads. In addition, when the effect display of the effect display device 5 is turned on when the light guide plate 501 is turned off in the light emission effect, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 can be visually recognized during the advance operation. The light of the effect display device 5 is backlit as viewed from the player, the surroundings of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 in front are brighter, and the visibility from the player is lowered. That is, only the silhouettes of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are visible. In this case, it is preferable that the effect display image of the effect display device 5 has a larger amount of light than the effect display image of the embodiment.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 that are movably provided, and the first movable bodies 302L and 302R. And a light guide plate 501 that forms on the player side in the depth direction a predetermined light guide pattern that overlaps at least a part of the moving areas E1, E2 of the second movable body 402, and includes the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and 2 Since the light emission effect of causing the light emission region 506 of the light guide plate 501 to emit light can be executed in at least a part of the moving period of the movable body 402, the first movable body is executed by executing the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501. Since it becomes difficult to visually recognize the movement of 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402, it is possible to improve the effect.

  Specifically, when the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are in the advancement operation (period from the advancement operation start Ta2 to the advancement operation end Ta3), a predetermined image is displayed on the light guide plate 501. When (still image) is displayed by light emission, since the light guide plate 501 is disposed in front of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, the light guide plate 501 is moved forward, that is, on the player side. The emitted light makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 behind the light guide plate 501. That is, since it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the state in which the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are moving, the player can determine which of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 is. You can be interested in how it is. When the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 is finished, the player can visually recognize the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, and the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 Since the state can be grasped, the player can be surprised.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 that are movably provided, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R, and the second movable body. The light guide plate 501 that forms a predetermined light guide pattern on the player side in the depth direction, which overlaps at least a part of the movement areas E1 and E2 of the body 402, and the movement areas of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 And an effect display device 5 in which a display area is arranged so as to overlap at least a part of E1 and E2, and at least a part of the movement period of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402. Since it is possible to execute a light-emitting effect that causes the light-emitting area 506 of the light guide plate 501 to emit light, the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the like are executed by executing the light-emitting effect by the light guide plate 501. The movement of the second movable member 402 is less visible, it is possible to improve the performance effect.

  Specifically, when the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are in the advancement operation (period from the advancement operation start Ta2 to the advancement operation end Ta3), a predetermined image is displayed on the light guide plate 501. When (still image) is displayed by light emission, since the light guide plate 501 is disposed in front of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, the light guide plate 501 is moved forward, that is, on the player side. The emitted light makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 behind the light guide plate 501. That is, since it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the state in which the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are moving, the player can determine which of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 is. You can be interested in how it is. When the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 is finished, the player can visually recognize the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, and the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 Since the state can be grasped, the player can be surprised. Further, the effect display device 5 is disposed rearward so that the display area thereof overlaps at least part of the moving areas E1 and E2 of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, and thus the light guide plate 501. , A motion effect by the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, and a display effect by the effect display device 5 can be performed in a state where they are superimposed in front and back, respectively. Will improve.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 that are movably provided, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R, and the second movable body. A light guide plate 501 that forms a predetermined light guide pattern on the player side in the depth direction and at least a part of the moving area E1, E2 of the body 402, and the effect display device 5; In addition, it is possible to execute a light emission effect in which the light emitting region 506 of the light guide plate 501 emits light during at least a part of the moving period of the second movable body 402, and corresponds to the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402. Since the effect display can be performed by the effect display device 5, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable are performed by executing the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501. Since 402 movement is less visible, it is possible to improve the performance effect.

  Specifically, when the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are in the advancement operation (period from the advancement operation start Ta2 to the advancement operation end Ta3), a predetermined image is displayed on the light guide plate 501. When (still image) is displayed by light emission, since the light guide plate 501 is disposed in front of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, the light guide plate 501 is moved forward, that is, on the player side. The emitted light makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 behind the light guide plate 501. That is, since it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the state in which the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are moving, the player can determine which of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 is. You can be interested in how it is. When the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 is finished, the player can visually recognize the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, and the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 Since the state can be grasped, the player can be surprised. Furthermore, since the effect display device 5 can execute effect display corresponding to the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 is terminated and the first movable bodies 302L and 302R. And when the 2nd movable body 402 becomes visible, for example, the production which makes the 1st movable bodies 302L and 302R and the 2nd movable body 402 stand out can be performed, and the interest of a composite production improves.

  In addition, during the movement period of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, the first movable body 302L, which is behind the light guide plate 501 from the player by performing a light emitting effect by the front light guide plate device 500. Compared with the case where the front of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 is covered with a shutter made of a non-translucent plate material or the like in order to make it difficult to visually recognize at least part of the 302R and the second movable body 402. Thus, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the light emission effect of the light guide plate device 500, thereby making it difficult to pay attention to the movement of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402. The unexpectedness when the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 appear at the first advanced position and the second advanced position in accordance with the end is preferably enhanced. Kill.

  In particular, the second movable body 402 includes a first effect unit 411A, second effect units 411B and 411D, and a third effect unit 411C, which are sideways when in the first standby position and overlap each other in the front-rear direction. It arrange | positions and is provided so that it may make a predetermined | prescribed form by moving to a 1st advance position (refer FIG. 16, FIG. 17). That is, when the first movable body 302L, 302R appears at the first advanced position due to the end of the light emission effect, the form is different when the first standby position is moved to the first advanced position. The unexpectedness can be improved suitably.

  Furthermore, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are arranged at the first standby position and a second standby position different from the first standby position, and are each independently movable at a timing other than the combined effect. Since it is a movable body that can execute the production and is close to (combined) with each other in the composite production, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are moved to the first advancing position, the first The unexpectedness when it appears in the state united in 2 advance positions can be improved suitably.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, by performing the light emission effect by the light-guide plate apparatus 500 in at least one part of the advancing operation period of 1st movable body 302L, 302R and the 2nd movable body 402, it is the back of the light-guide plate 501 from a player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are not limited to this. You may make it at least one part of the 2nd movable body 402 invisible.

  As a method of reducing the visibility of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, increasing the light emission luminance of the light guide plate LED 502, making the emission color the same as or similar to the surface color of the movable body, It is preferable to apply at least one of making the surface color of the movable body a dark color (black or the like) and arranging a plurality of light guide plates 501 in a superimposed manner.

  In the above embodiment, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first movable bodies 302L and 302R Only one moving region of the second movable body 402 is provided so as to overlap at least a part of the light emitting region 506 so that the visibility of one movable body is difficult in at least a part of the moving period. Also good.

  In the embodiment, the light-emitting effect by the light guide plate device 500 that is executed in at least a part of the advancing operation period of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 is the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the first movable bodies 302L and 302R. Although the mode executed in at least a part of the advancing operation period of the two movable bodies 402 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be executed in at least a part of the evacuation operation period.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the light-emitting effect by the light guide plate 501 is continued over the advancing operation period of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 (the period from the advancing operation start time Ta2 to the advancing operation end time Ta3). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are described by taking the form (pattern 1 in FIG. 23A and pattern 2 in FIG. 23B) as an example. And the light emission effect of the light-guide plate 501 should just be executable in the one part period among the movement periods of the 2nd movable body 402. FIG.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 24B, the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 is started from the time Td1 when the composite effect start condition is satisfied, and the advance operation of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 is started. It may be continued during Td2 and may be terminated before the time Td3 when the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are advanced. As described above, the light emitting effect is performed only during a part of the period (first half) from the start to the end of the advance operation of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402. Thus, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 can be easily seen from the middle of movement, but the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body in the middle of movement in a situation where it is not known that the operation has started. Since 402 suddenly appears, the player can be surprised.

  In addition, in FIG. 24B, the mode in which the light emitting effect is performed in the first half of the period from the start of the advance operation of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 to the end thereof is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and the light emitting effect is executed in the middle of the period from the start of the advance operation of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 to the end thereof. Alternatively, the light emission effect may be executed in the second half of the period from the start of the advance operation of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 to the end thereof.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the combined effect, the operation effects of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, the light guide plate effect (light emission effect) by the light guide plate device 500, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R, and the first Although the embodiment including an effect by each movable body LED provided on the movable body 402 and a display effect by the effect display device 5 has been described as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least the first movable body. It is only necessary to include the operation effects of 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 and the light guide plate effect by the light guide plate device 500. Display effects (for example, effect display effects, etc.) corresponding to the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 by the device 5 are provided. It may be one that does not row.

  In addition, when performing a composite effect only with the operation effects of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 and the light guide plate effect by the light guide plate device 500, the non-light emitting portions 507A to 507F of the light guide plate 501 are made to emit light. Even if the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are prevented from being visible from the non-light emitting portions 507A to 507F by setting 506 (the entire surface of the light guide plate 501 is the light emitting region 506). Good. In other words, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 may be made invisible when the light guide plate 501 emits light.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment demonstrated and mentioned as an example the form performed after displaying a predetermined | prescribed effect design (lottery result) after performing a super reach effect with the effect display apparatus 5 in the said embodiment. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be executed at appropriate timing. For example, composite effects are executed at other timings during symbol variation display, such as when a reach state is established, when it develops to super reach, when symbol variation display is started, or when a pseudo-run is executed. You may make it do. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is aligned and re-varied to notify that it is a probability variation jackpot, or when performing a promotion effect that informs that a probability variation jackpot has been promoted during the jackpot, It may be executed at various other timings such as when notifying that there is a big hit or notifying that the big hit round will continue.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, the light emission area | region 506 is the movement area | region E1 of the 1st movable bodies 302L and 302R which operate | move on the back side of the light-guide plate 501, the movement area | region E2 of the 2nd movable body 402, and the effect display apparatus 5 of FIG. Although the present invention has been described by taking as an example a form formed so as to overlap with the display area in the front-rear direction, the present invention is not limited to this, and the light-emitting area 506 includes the first movable body. 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 may be formed so as to overlap at least part of the moving areas E1, E2 of the second movable body 402, and the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and part of the second movable body 402 are formed by the light emitting area 506. It is difficult for the player to visually recognize the mechanism part E or the main production part (for example, the mechanism part E or the main production part), and the first movable bodies 302L and 302L are formed by areas other than the light emitting area 506 (non-light emitting area 507). And a portion of the second movable member 402 may be made visible from the player at the time of advancing movement.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, the effect display apparatus 5, the movement area E1 of the 1st movable bodies 302L and 302R, and the movement area E2 of the 2nd movable body 402 are arrange | positioned so that it may overlap with front and back. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect display device 5, the moving area E1 of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R, and the moving area E2 of the second movable body 402 are not necessarily front and rear. It does not have to be superimposed on. For example, the effect display device 5, the moving area E1 of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R, and the moving area E2 of the second movable body 402 may be shifted from side to side or up and down so as not to overlap.

  Even in this case, the effect display device 5 can execute effect display (for example, effect display effect) corresponding to the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402. Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the form which performs an effect display effect was illustrated as an example of the effect display corresponding to 1st movable body 302L, 302R and the 2nd movable body 402, this invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, for example, a display other than the effect may be used, such as an effect display that displays an image related to the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 (an image imitating the movable body).

  In addition, since the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 is executed from the start to the end of the movement of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable bodies 302L and 302R Since the movement of the second movable body 402 has been completed and the movement of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 becomes more difficult to visually recognize, the effect of production can be improved.

  That is, since the execution of the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 is started before Ta2 when the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 start the advance operation, the player can make the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the first movable bodies 302L and 302R It is difficult to grasp whether or not the second movable body 402 has started to operate, and the effect of giving interest to the state of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 is improved. In order to perform a light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 for a predetermined period after the advancing operation end time Ta3 of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 (a period from the advancing operation end time Ta3 to the light emission effect end time Ta4). When the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 is terminated, the player can visually recognize the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 positioned at the first advance position and the second advance position, and the effect is improved. To do.

  Note that a predetermined period after the advancing operation end Ta3 of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 (a period from the advancing operation end Ta3 to the light emission effect end Ta4) can be set as appropriate. For example, a state in which the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 cannot be visually recognized is set by extending a predetermined period after Ta3 when the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are advanced. It may be continued for a long time so that the player is more interested.

  In addition, it includes an effect control CPU 120 that determines one of a plurality of types of light emission effects of the light effect produced by the light guide plate 501 and a CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 that controls an advantageous state advantageous to the player. The effect control CPU 120 determines the light emission mode according to whether or not the CPU 103 is controlled to be in an advantageous state, and the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 emits light in the light emission mode determined by the effect control CPU 120. Therefore, the player can be expected according to the type of the light emission mode of the light guide plate 501, so that the interest can be improved.

  Specifically, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 gives a variation pattern designation command indicating a variation pattern indicating a variation mode such as a variation time of a representation symbol, a type of reach representation, and the presence or absence of a pseudo-continuity to the representation control board 12. Send. The ROM 121 included in the effect control board 12 stores a movable body movement mode determination table, a light guide plate light emission mode determination table, a movable body LED light emission mode determination table, and an effect display device display mode determination table. Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the symbol variation display result specified from the variation pattern designation command is a jackpot display result, a movable body movement mode determination table, a light guide plate light emission mode determination table, a movable body Based on the LED light emission mode determination table and the effect display device display mode determination table, for example, various effect modes (effect patterns) are determined by lottery using a random number for effects, etc., and effects are generated based on the effect modes determined by the lottery. Run. Therefore, the moving mode of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, the light emitting mode of the light guide plate 501, the light emitting mode of the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R and 407A to 407D, and the display mode of the effect display device 5 are changed. For example, it is possible to cause the light guide plate LED 502 to emit light in white, red, and flash modes, and when the player displays a variation display result of a symbol as a jackpot display result, the player displays an outlier display result. When the player performs light emission with red or flash at a higher rate than the case, the player performs a light emission effect of red or flash with the light guide plate device 500, thereby executing a light emission effect of white Since it can be expected that the jackpot display result is derived, the interest of the game is improved. Further, since the combined effect is executed by combining various effects, the range of the combined effect is widened.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the big hit gaming state is applied as an example of the advantageous state advantageous to the player is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous state advantageous to the player is For example, it includes a time-short state in which time-short control is performed, a probability variation state in which probability variation control is performed, and the like.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an effect display device 5, and the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 have movable bodies LEDs 307L, 307R, and 407A to 407D, and execute the light emission effect of the light guide plate 501. Since the effect display device 5, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R, and the second movable body 402 movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, and 407A to 407D are turned off, the effect of the light emission effect of the light guide plate 501 is enhanced. The visibility of movement of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 can be further reduced. That is, a part of the light emission effect of the light guide plate 501, specifically, the effect display device 5, the first movable bodies 302 </ b> L, 302 </ b> R, and the second during the period from the time Ta <b> 1 when the composite effect start condition is satisfied to the time Ta <b> 3 when the advancing operation ends. Since the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D of the movable body 402 are turned off, the light-emitting effect of the light guide plate 501 stands out, and the visibility of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 is further reduced. Acts synergistically.

  Further, the second movable body 402 is a part for moving the second movable body 402, and a mechanism portion E that is at least partially visible from the player when the second movable body 402 is at least moving. The predetermined light guide pattern is arranged in front of the moving region of the mechanism part E in the second movable body 402, so that the mechanism part E of the second movable body 402 is difficult to visually recognize due to the light emission effect of the light guide plate 501. be able to.

  By doing in this way, even if the mechanism part E of the moving mechanism part becomes visible from the player according to the movement of the second movable body 402, the mechanism part E is concealed by the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the mechanism portion E, and thus it is possible to prevent the aesthetic appearance during the movement of the second movable body 402 from being impaired.

  Further, when the second movable body 402 reaches the second advance position, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are arranged on the left and right sides of the second rendering unit 411B in the second movable body 402. In particular, the first movable body 302L on the left side moves so as to overlap the front side of the mechanism portion E, which is a part of the second movable base 410B, so that the mechanism portion E is concealed by the first movable body 302L and the player Therefore, even if the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 is finished, the appearance of the second movable body 402 can be prevented from being damaged.

  In addition, the light emitting effect of the light guide plate 501 is executed when the second movable body 402 moves from the second standby position to the second advanced position by forming the mechanism portion E with a translucent member or the like having translucency. You may make the visibility of the mechanism part E more difficult.

  The first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 include movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, and 407A to 407D, and the light guide plate 501 has a light emitting region 506 that forms a predetermined light guide pattern and a predetermined guide. The first movable body has the non-light emitting portions 507A to 507E in the non-light emitting area 507 where the light pattern is not formed, and the movable bodies LEDs 307L, 307R and 407A to 407D are arranged so as to correspond to the non-light emitting portions 507A to 507E. 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 can be operated to perform a light-emitting effect by the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D and the light guide plate 501, so that the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D Not only the light emission, but also the first non-light emitting portion 507A-507E Elements 302L, 302R and the movable member of the second movable member 402 LED307L, 307R, it is possible to emit light at 407A～407D, it is possible to improve the performance effect of emission effect.

  In the embodiment described above, the movable LEDs 307L, 307R, and 407A to 407D are arranged as an example at positions corresponding to the non-light emitting portions 507A to 507E, which are areas surrounded by the light emitting area 506. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LED may be disposed so as to correspond to the non-light emitting region 507. For example, the movable body LED may be disposed so as to correspond to the non-light emitting portion 507F in the non-light emitting region 507.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the aspect including the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 has been described. However, at least a part of the light emitting region 506 that is a predetermined light guide pattern of the light guide plate 501 is the movable body. As long as it arrange | positions so that it may overlap ahead, one movable body may be sufficient and three or more may be provided. Further, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R move from the first standby position to the first advanced position (from the upper side to the lower side), and the second movable body 402 moves from the second standby position to the second advanced position (from the lower side to the upper side). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 may move in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction or the rotation direction. Good. The first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 may move in the same direction so as to follow the respective movements, or may move in intersecting directions.

  Moreover, although the light emission part provided in a movable body illustrated the form formed with light sources, such as light emitting diodes, such as movable body LED307L, 307R, 407A-407D, in the said embodiment, this invention is not limited to this. If the light emitting unit is configured to irradiate light, the light source is provided separately from the light emitting unit, and the light emitting unit emits light by being guided by a light guide member or the like. Also good.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the light emission area | region 506 of the light-guide plate 501 showed the example comprised by the some recessed part 510 formed in the back surface of the light-guide plate 501, the light which injected into the inside of the light-guide plate 501 was shown. If the display information can be displayed on the light guide plate 501 by being emitted from the front surface of the light guide plate 501, for example, the light incident on the inside of the light guide plate 501 is not totally reflected from the front surface of the light guide plate 501. It may be a light transmission guiding portion such as a plurality of convex portions to be emitted, or is formed inside the light guide plate 501 instead of the concave portion or the convex portion formed on the front and rear surfaces of the light guide plate 501, and the light guide plate 501. It may be a reflection part or the like that reflects light incident on the light guide plate 501 so that light is emitted from the front surface.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the light guide plate 501 showed the example transparent, what is necessary is just to have translucency so that display information can be displayed by reflecting the light from a light source, translucent or An opaque light guide plate may be used. Further, the light guide plate may be colored or colored and transparent.

  In the above-described embodiment, the light guide unit is configured by a single light guide plate 501, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and a plurality of light guide plates provided to overlap in the front-rear direction. It may be constituted by. In addition, when the light guide unit includes a plurality of light guide plates, an image in which the first region provided in each light guide plate is displayed by light emission may be different for each light guide plate. In this case, the light emitting portion provided on the movable body may be disposed at a position corresponding to a non-light emitting region provided on at least one of the plurality of light guide plates.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the light guide plate apparatus 500 showed the example attached to the front side of the effect display apparatus 5 of the game board 2, even if it attaches to places other than the front side of the effect display apparatus 5 of the game board 2, it is. For example, the glass window 50a of the gaming machine frame 3 is formed by the light guide plate 501, and the light guide plate device is configured such that light is incident on the light guide plate 501, and the light guide plate is provided on the gaming machine frame 3. An apparatus 500 may be provided.

  In the embodiment, the effect display on the effect display device 5 is displayed at the time when the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 positioned at the first advance position and the second advance position become visible. The mode of acting so that the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are made to stand out is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect image of the effect display device 5 and the first movable body The bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 may be continuously connected with each other so as to form one symbol or the like.

In the above embodiment, the light guide plate device 500 is illustrated as an example of the light guide unit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, instead of the light guide plate device 500, a transmissive liquid crystal display or a transmissive liquid crystal display can be used. A type EL (electroluminescence) display device or the like may be applied.
[Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment (second embodiment) of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 33 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2A formed in a frame shape provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. The structure including the board 2).

  There is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 90 on the lower surface of the glass door frame 2A. Under the hitting ball supply tray 90, there are provided an extra ball receiving tray 91 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 90 and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 92 for firing the hitting ball. The game board 2 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2A. The game board 2 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 2 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 10 is formed on the front surface of the game board 2 in which a game ball that has been driven can flow down.

  The member that forms the extra ball tray (lower tray) 91 is configured in a stick shape (bar shape), for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower tray body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). Is attached to the stick controller 31A that can be tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right). It should be noted that the stick controller 31A has a predetermined operation by, for example, performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). A trigger button 31C (see FIG. 35) capable of performing an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 35C (see FIG. 35) that detects a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation or the like on the trigger button 31C is provided inside the operation stick of the stick controller 31A. 35). In addition, a controller sensor unit (tilt direction sensor unit) 35A (see FIG. 35) for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided in the lower pan body inside the stick controller 31A. The stick controller 31A incorporates a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 35) for causing the stick controller 31A to vibrate.

  The member that forms the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 90 is subjected to a predetermined instruction operation by a player's pressing operation or the like, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). A possible push button 31B is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 35 </ b> B (see FIG. 35) that detects the player's operation action performed on the push button 31 </ b> B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31 </ b> B. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 33, the attachment positions of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, it is good also considering the attachment position of push button 31B and stick controller 31A as the position put to either the right or left in an upper plate and a lower plate, maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the attachment position of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A is not in a vertical positional relationship, but may be in a horizontal positional relationship, for example.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 10, an effect display device 5 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided. The display screen of the effect display device 5 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbols synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 5 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 5. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 5 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 4A is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 5 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 4A executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 4B, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 5 along with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game. .

  Further, in the effect display device 5, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol). Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 5 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out of” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the case where the display of the effect symbol is displayed as the effect of the liquid crystal display in the effect display device 5 is shown, but the effect performed in the effect display device 5 is the one shown in this embodiment. For example, an effect having a predetermined story characteristic may be executed, and an effect may be executed in which the result of the story is displayed based on the determination result of the jackpot determination or the variation pattern. For example, perform a battle effect where professional wrestling or soccer matches and enemy characters fight, perform an effect to win the game or battle if it is a big hit, and perform an effect to defeat the game or battle if it is off Also good. Further, for example, instead of displaying the result such as winning or losing, an effect may be executed in which a predetermined story such as a story is developed in order.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 5, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9 c and 9 d for displaying the fourth symbol after the effect symbol, the special symbol described later, and the normal symbol. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol described later, There is provided a fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variation display of the effect symbol is varied on the side of the effect control microcomputer 115). This is done by measuring the variation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing an effect using the effect display device 5, for example, the effect contents including the change display of the effect symbol disappear for a moment from the screen. There are a variety of effects such as effects being performed and effects in which movable objects shield all or part of the screen. For this reason, even if the display screen on the effect display device 5 is viewed, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current variation display is in progress. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether or not the state of the current variation is being displayed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further displaying the variation of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 5. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation, and is not disappeared from the screen or shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The 4th symbol for the first special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The 4th symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state where the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 4A is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 4B is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same. Further, when the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 4A, the display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (a display color different from the loss. Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but when it is a big hit, it is displayed in red. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 4B, the display color reminiscent of the jackpot in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. (The display color is different from the loss. For example, the display color is blue in the case of a loss, whereas it is displayed in red in the case of a big hit. The display color may be changed depending on whether it is R-probable big hit, 8R probable big hit, or sudden probable big hit.) The 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d are turned off. The display color at the time is desirably a display color (for example, black) different from the background image in order to prevent the display color from being assimilated with the background image and disappearing.

  In this embodiment, a case where the fourth symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 5 is shown, but a light emitter such as a lamp or LED is used separately from the effect display device 5. Thus, the fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed may be indicated depending on whether or not it is displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 5. Moreover, you may make it implement | achieve the 4th symbol display area common with respect to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using light-emitting bodies, such as a lamp | ramp and LED. In this case, when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the display of different display colors at certain time intervals may be performed by distinguishing and executing the variation display of the fourth symbol by performing display that repeatedly turns on and off. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, The display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display that repeatedly turns on and off at different time intervals. In addition, for example, when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the same big hit symbol is obtained. However, you may make it stop-display the stop symbol of a different aspect.

  On the right side of the central portion of the game board 2, a first special symbol display (first variable display portion) 4A for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 4A is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the first special symbol display 4A is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the right side of the first special symbol display 4A, a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 4B for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 4B is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 4B is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. The first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) of 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 4A and the second special symbol indicator 4B are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  In this embodiment, the case where two special symbol indicators 4A and 4B are provided is shown, but the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball is the normal winning ball device 6A or the normal variable winning ball device 6B). After passing (including winning), a variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) And a state where the big hit game is not executed) is established, and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, a display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  Below the effect display device 5, a winning device having a normal winning ball device 6A is provided. The game ball that has won the normal winning ball device 6A is guided to the back of the game board 2 and detected by the first start port switch 22A.

  Further, below the winning device having the normal winning ball device (first starting winning port, first starting port) 6A, there is provided a variable winning ball device 6 having an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B capable of winning a game ball. ing. The game ball that has won the normal variable winning ball device (second start winning opening, second start opening) 6B is guided to the back of the game board 2 and detected by the second start opening switch 22B. The variable winning ball device 6 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 6 is in the open state, the game ball can be won in the normal variable winning ball device 6B (it is easier to start and win), which is advantageous to the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 6 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the normal variable winning ball device 6B than the normal winning ball device 6A. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 6 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the normal variable winning ball device 6B. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 6 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the normal winning ball device 6A than the normal variable winning ball device 6B. In the state where the variable winning ball device 6 is in the closed state, the winning ball may be difficult (that is, the gaming ball is difficult to win) although it is difficult to win.

  Hereinafter, the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B may be collectively referred to as a start winning port or a starting port.

  When the variable winning ball device 6 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 6 is very likely to win the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The normal winning ball device 6A is provided immediately below the effect display device 5. However, the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 5 and the normal winning ball device 6A is further reduced, or the periphery of the normal winning ball device 6A. The nail is arranged densely, or the nail arrangement around the normal winning ball device 6A is difficult to guide the game ball to the normal winning ball device 6A, and the normal variable winning ball device 6B has a normal winning rate. You may make it make it higher than the winning rate of 6A of ball apparatuses.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, the variable winning ball device 6 that opens and closes only the normal variable winning ball device 6B is provided, but the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. Any of the ball devices 6B may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  Above the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, the number of effective winning balls entered into the normal winning ball device 6A, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is referred to as the start memory or the start prize memory). A first hold display (first special symbol hold storage display) 25A comprising four displays for displaying. The first hold indicator 25A increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one every time there is an effective start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the first special symbol display 4A is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  In addition, above the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, there are four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the normal variable winning ball device 6B, that is, the second reserved memory number. A second hold indicator (second special symbol hold storage indicator) 25B is provided. The second hold indicator 25B increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 4B is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  In addition, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 5, a total pending storage display unit 18 c that displays a total number (total pending storage count) that is the sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is provided. ing. In this embodiment, the total pending storage display unit 18c that displays the total number is provided, so that it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition. . In this embodiment, in the total hold storage display unit 18c, the first hold memory and the second hold memory are awarded to the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B as images imitating game balls. They are displayed in order and displayed in such a manner that they can be recognized as the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory (for example, the first reserved memory is displayed in a red frame, and the second reserved memory is blue. Displayed in a frame).

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the combined hold storage display unit 18c is “red” that is red, “green” that is green, “blue” that is blue, and “white” that is white. Is provided. The reliability of the jackpot indicated by the hold display (hereinafter also referred to as the jackpot expectation) is higher in the order of “red”> “green”> “blue”> “white”. For example, when a start prize is generated, it is determined whether or not a hold notice effect is to be executed, and when the hold notice effect is executed, which display mode is used as an upper limit to display the hold indication is a big hit. It determines based on the reliability with respect to this, and a hold display is displayed by making the determined display mode into an upper limit. Note that, regardless of whether or not the hold notice effect is executed, the hold display is started in the display mode of “white” when the start winning is generated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the combined hold storage display unit 18c, hold display for the hold storage that has not yet been changed is performed, and from the start of the change display to the hold storage until the end thereof, The hold display for the hold storage is continuously displayed on the active display unit 18d different from the combined hold storage display unit 18c. In other words, the active display unit 18d displays an active display (a variable display-corresponding image) corresponding to the variable display being executed. The active display is an image showing the reliability with respect to the occurrence of a big hit based on the fluctuation during execution. The active display is the same image as the on-hold display described above (an image imitating a game ball, and the display mode is red “red”, green “green”, blue “blue”, white A certain “white” is provided, and the reliability of the big hit is “red”> “green”> “blue”> “white”.

  The effect display device 5 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 4A and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 4B. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 4A and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 5 are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 4B and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 5 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 4A and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 4B, the effect display device 5 causes the jackpot to be recalled. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 33, a special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the variable winning ball device 6. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 4A, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 4B. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 17 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided on the left side of the game board 2. The normal symbol display 20 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 20 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 6 is opened for a predetermined number of times. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 6 is a state that is advantageous from the disadvantageous state for the player when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (a state in which a game ball can be won in the normal variable winning ball device 6B). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 20, a general symbol hold display (normal symbol hold storage display) 25C having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a passing of a game ball to the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the usual figure hold indicator 25C increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time the variable display on the normal symbol display 20 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. In addition, a high probability state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is a high probability state (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a variation display result of a special symbol is increased compared to the normal state) However, except for the high probability / low base state described later), the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 20 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 6 are increased. .

  On the left and right sides of the game area 10 of the game board 2, there are provided decorative LEDs that are blinked and displayed during the game, and at the bottom there is an out port 26 through which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 10. On the outer periphery of the game area 10, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  The gaming machine includes a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to the player operating the ball striking operation handle 92 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch the game ball into the gaming area 10. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 10 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 10, and then descends the game area 10. When the game ball enters the normal winning ball device 6A and is detected by the first start switch 22A, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first The first special symbol display 4A starts variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 5 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the normal winning ball device 6A. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the normal variable winning ball device 6B and is detected by the second start port switch 22B, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 4B starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 5 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the normal variable winning ball device 6B. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when a big hit of a predetermined type is made, the game state is shifted to a so-called probability change state after the jackpot game is finished, the game state is shifted to a high probability state, and the game ball is easy to start winning (that is, Then, a transition is made to the high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that the variable display execution condition in the special symbol displays 4A and 4B and the effect display device 5 is easily established. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 6 is opened is increased, or the time during which the variable winning ball device 6 is in the open state is extended, compared to a case where the high base state is not. It becomes easier to win a start. In this embodiment, when a big hit is made, the state is always shifted to a high probability state. However, when a big hit is made, in addition to the high probability state, a so-called time-short state (for example, a low probability state, and The gaming machine may be configured so as to be shifted to a high base state.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball device 6 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 20 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 20 becomes a winning symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 20 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball apparatus 6 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by controlling the transition to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 20 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 6 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball apparatus 6 are increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state). That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 6 are increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 20 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is won increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 6 is in the open state increases, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, the change time of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened by shifting to the short time state when the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and production symbols is shortened. The frequency of being played (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory becomes faster), and the situation where an invalid start prize is generated can be reduced. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by making transitions to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it is easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). You may make it move to a base state.

  FIG. 34 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. As shown in FIG. FIG. 34 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 12, and the like. A game control microcomputer 100 that controls the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 11. The game control microcomputer 100 includes a ROM 101 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 102 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 103 and an I / O 105 for performing control operations in accordance with the program. In this embodiment, the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 are built in the game control microcomputer 100. That is, the game control microcomputer 100 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may include at least the RAM 103 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101 may be external or internal. Further, the I / O 105 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 100 further incorporates a random number circuit 530 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 102 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means that is partly or entirely backed up by a backup power source created in the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special symbol process flag and a high probability flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 102 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 101. Therefore, hereinafter, the game control microcomputer 100 (or CPU 103) executes (or performs processing). Specifically, the CPU 103 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 11.

  The random number circuit 530 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 530 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 530 selects and sets a numeric data update range selection function (initial value selection setup function and upper limit selection selection function), numeric data update rule selection setup function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 100 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 530. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 100 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 101 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 100). The numerical data obtained in this way is set as the initial value of the numerical data that the random number circuit 530 updates. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 530 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for providing detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 100 is also mounted on the main board 11. Also, an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 6 and the solenoid 17 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a large winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 100 is also provided. 11 is mounted.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 includes a first special symbol display 4A, a second special symbol display 4B that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 20 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first hold indicator 25A. Then, display control of the second hold indicator 25B and the general-purpose hold indicator 25C is performed.

  An information output circuit 64 that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 160 is also mounted on the main board 11.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (comprising an effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 12 instructs the contents of the effect from the game control microcomputer 100 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 5 that variably displays effect symbols is performed.

  The effect control means mounted on the effect control board 12 controls the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35 and from the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70. Control the sound output.

  FIG. 35 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 12, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 35, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 12 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 115 and an effect control microcomputer 115 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 115 is not backed up. In the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 11 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 152 and the input port 153. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 5 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 5 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 115 is mounted on the effect control board 12. The VDP 109 has an address space independent from the effect control microcomputer 115, and maps the VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 5 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 outputs a command for reading necessary data from the CGROM (not shown) to the VDP 109 in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 5, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads out image data from the CGROM in response to a command from the effect control CPU 120. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 152 on the effect control board 12. The input driver 152 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 12 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 12 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 11 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 12 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 35 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 11 via the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 to the inside of the main board 11 is restricted. That is, a signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O 105 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the trigger button 31C of the stick controller 31A has been detected from the trigger sensor 35C via the input port 156. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the push button 31B has been detected from the push sensor 35B via the input port 156. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the operation stick of the stick controller 31A has been detected from the controller sensor unit 35A via the input port 156. Further, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 155, thereby causing the stick controller 31A to vibrate.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 155. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 154.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 103 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value of the specific register (I register) (1 byte) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 103 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). If it is confirmed that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 103 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  After confirming that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 103 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 103 performs a game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 102) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating a gaming state before stopping power supply (special symbol process flag, high probability flag, high base flag, etc.), and an area where the output state of the output port is saved (output) Port buffer), a portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Further, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command designating a display result (15R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit, small hit or out) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 12. (Step S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, for example, when the value of the special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 103 also transmits the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 45). You may make it do. In this case, the presentation control microcomputer 115 may restart the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command or the second symbol variation designation command.

  In this embodiment, the value of a variable time timer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, measurement of the saved variation time timer value is resumed, and the variation display of the special symbol is resumed and saved. When the value of the changed time timer has timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is further transmitted. In this embodiment, a special symbol process flag value, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  Note that the display result designation command is not necessarily transmitted when the power failure is restored, but the CPU 103 may first confirm whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is zero. . If the value of the variation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the variation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the state has not been reached, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 103 may first confirm whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that the power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, the fluctuation occurs at the time of the power failure. The display result designation command may not be transmitted because it is determined that it is not in the middle.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of a counter value for generating a random number for determination per normal symbol) may be left as it is. Further, the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol per-determining random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state are initialized. Value is set.

  In addition, the CPU 103 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 11 is mounted). An initialization designation command (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 100 has executed initialization processing). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 115 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuit 530 (step S14). For example, the CPU 103 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 530 to update the value of the random R.

  In step S15, the CPU 103 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit, The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win for a normal symbol (normal random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed using an effect symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 5. Further, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is executed except in some cases. In this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, “a big hit without reach” (also referred to as “sudden big hit”) is provided as a variation pattern in which the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Note that, in the case of a sudden probability change big hit, the probability change big hit symbol (for example, “135”) may be stopped and displayed instead of reaching. When the display result of the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery to determine the variation pattern type and variation pattern using random numbers. To do. However, it is the production control microcomputer 115 that actually executes the reach production control.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 103 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when the CPU 103 detects that the power-off signal is output, the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 103 displays the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, the normal symbol display 20, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the general figure hold indicator 25C. Display control processing for performing control is executed (step S22). For the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, and the normal symbol display 20, a drive signal is output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33. Execute control.

  Also, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 103 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 103 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 20 in a predetermined order. The CPU 103 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 103 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 115 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 103 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 103 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 103 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 103 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data in accordance with the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32).

  Further, the CPU 103 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 103 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 103 executes a normal symbol effect display on the normal symbol display 20 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B and the effect display device 5, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effects that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching reach. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “ordinary shift” or “non-reach shift”) in the case where the variable display result is a loss pattern.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B and the effect display device 5, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the effect symbols are all stopped and displayed in each of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 5 (however, suddenly probable big hit In some cases, there is a case where the probability variation big hit symbol (for example, “135”) is suddenly stopped without being reached).

  When “5”, which is a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B, in the effect display device 5, the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “suddenly probable big hit”. In the same manner as in the case where the effect symbol is variably displayed, a predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability variation big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect on the effect display device 5 corresponding to the fact that “5”, which is the small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol indicator 4B is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. .

  Here, the small win is a hit that is allowed up to a small number of times that the big winning opening is opened compared to the big win (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). When the small hit game ends, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probability variation state to the normal state or from the normal state to the certain variation state. In addition, the sudden probability change big hit is allowed up to a small number of times of opening of the big prize opening in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice), but the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely large. It is a big hit that is a short jackpot and the game state after the big hit game is shifted to a probable state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it suddenly became a probable state) Is). In other words, in this embodiment, the sudden winning odds and the small wins have the same opening pattern of the big prize opening. By controlling in such a way, if the winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is impossible to recognize whether it is suddenly a big hit or a small hit, so a high probability state for the player (Probable change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Note that when the big hit types are all probable big hits, the small hits need not be provided. In addition, when the big hit types are all probabilistic big hits, as shown in the present embodiment, as shown in the present embodiment, only the transition to the high probability state and the sudden probable change without the high base state are required. It is preferable to provide a big hit.

  FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 38, in this embodiment, the non-reach PA1-1 to non-variable are used as the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect design is “non-reach”. A variation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. Further, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are variations patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”. Fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-2 and Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-2 are prepared. As shown in FIG. 38, re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 with pseudo-continuous effects used when not reaching. Of the variation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition, when normal PB2-1 is used, re-variation is performed once. Of the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, when normal PB2-2 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 among the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition effects, re-variation is performed three times. Note that the re-variation means that the variable display of the effect symbol is executed again after temporarily stopping the effect symbol that is once deviated from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Also, as shown in FIG. 38, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-5, normal PA2-3 to normal are provided as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of special symbols is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. PA2-4, normal PB2-3 to normal PB2-4, super PA3-3 to super PA3-4, super PB3-3 to super PB3-4, special PG1-1 to special PG1-3, special PG2-1 to special A variation pattern of PG2-2 is prepared. In FIG. 38, the fluctuation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 and special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 are fluctuation patterns that are used when sudden probability big hit or small hit. Also, as shown in FIG. 38, when the normal PB2-3 is used among the fluctuation patterns that are used in the case of sudden sudden change not big hit or small hit and have a pseudo-continuous effect, re-change is performed once. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-4 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-3 to super PA3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used for reaching and have the effect of pseudo-ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, for the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 that is used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-variation is performed once. Further, when using non-reach PA 1-5, it is a big hit without performing reach production. Hereinafter, jackpots that do not perform reach production are sometimes referred to as “sudden jackpots”.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38, when the variation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, the variation time is 32 in the case of Super Reach A with pseudo-ream). In the case of Super Reach A without pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds). Depending on the total number of pending storage, the variation time may be varied. For example, even with the same type of super reach, the variation time may be shortened as the total number of pending storage increases. Also, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the first reserved memory number. When the variable display of the two special symbols is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the second reserved memory number. In this case, a separate determination table is prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the reserved memory numbers 0 to 2 and the reserved memory numbers 3 and 4). For example, a determination table may be selected according to the value of the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number, and the change time may be varied.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot described later) (for jackpot type determination) (2) Random 2 (MR2): Variation pattern type ( (3) Random 3 (MR3): Determine variation pattern (variation time) (For variation pattern determination) (4) Random 4 (MR4): Hit based on normal symbol (5) Random 5 (MR5): The initial value of random 4 is determined (for determining random 4 initial value).

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and then the variation pattern determined using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). One of the variation patterns included in the pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, and include a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B. It may be divided into variable pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-ream, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of two variations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three variations. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo ream or a slip effect.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of 15R probability variation big hit and 8R probability variation big hit, normal CA3-1, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, normal reach and pseudo-ream Normal CA3-2, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern accompanying it, Super CA3-3, which is a variation pattern type accompanied by super reach, and Non-reach CA 3-4, which is a variation pattern type including variation pattern accompanied only by sudden big hit It is classified into and. In addition, in the case of sudden probability variation big hit, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and special CA4-2 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach. ing. Further, in the case of small hits, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern. Further, in the case of a deviation, it is a non-reach CA 2-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with no reach and a specific effect, and a variation pattern type that includes a change pattern with a specific effect without a reach. Non-reach CA2-2, non-reach CA2-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of shortened variation without reach and specific effects, and normal CA2-4 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach And normal CA2-5 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and two re-variation pseudo-continuations, and normal CA2 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with one normal reach and one re-variation pseudo-continuation -6 and super CA2-7 which is a variation pattern type with super reach Are the type divided into.

  In step S23 of the game control process shown in FIG. 37, the game control microcomputer 100 uses a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number (1) and the random number for determination per ordinary symbol (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware built in the game control microcomputer 100 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 100) is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that a software random number instead of a hardware random number may be used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 40A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 40 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 40 (A) is set in the probability variation big hit determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 40 (A) is the jackpot determination value.

  In this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted to a high probability state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the big hit lottery is increased, and is also changed to a high base state. There are two cases: a state that is only transferred to a state and a state that is not transferred to a high base state (which is a low base state). Is a jackpot determination table for probability variation, and a normal jackpot determination table is used in other cases. As will be described later, in this embodiment, when the 15R probability variation big hit or the 8R probability variation big hit is reached, after the big hit game is finished, the high probability state and the high base state are entered. After the big hit, the probability variation state and the high base state continue until the variation display is terminated 70 times. In addition, when the odd hit suddenly becomes a big hit, the game shifts to the high probability state without shifting to the high base state after the big hit game ends. After the big hit, the probability variation state continues until the variation display is terminated 70 times. Therefore, in this embodiment, after the big hit of the sudden probability change big hit, until the end of the 70th fluctuation display, only the high probability state is transferred and the high base state is not transferred (in the low base state). There is a case where there is a certain variation state.

  40B and 40C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and a small hit determination table used when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. (For the second special symbol). Each value described in FIG. 40B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) is set in FIG. Each numerical value listed is set. Also, the numerical values described in FIGS. 40B and 40C are small hit determination values.

  Note that it may be determined that a small hit is made only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Even if the game state is shifted to the probability change state, a small hit will be generated, and if it is configured to produce an effect asking whether or not the probability change will occur, even though the current game state is the probability change state On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoying. Therefore, if it is configured so that the small hit does not occur during the variation display of the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the probability variation state, it is difficult for the small hit to occur and the excessive effect is not given to the probability variation. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 530 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the big hit determination values, the special symbol is decided to be big hit (15R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit described later). Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 40B and 40C, it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 40A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. In addition, “probabilities” shown in FIGS. 40B and 40C indicate the probability (ratio) of small hits. Further, determining whether or not to win a jackpot means determining whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 40B and 40C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, a case where a small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 when the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol variation display is executed by starting the normal winning ball device 6A, the second variable symbol variation is started by winning the normal variable winning ball device 6B. Compared to the case where the display is executed, the ratio determined as “small hit” is high.

  40D and 40E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 101. FIG. Of these, FIG. 40 (D) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the holding memory based on the game ball winning the normal winning ball device 6A (that is, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). Jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. FIG. 40 (E) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the holding memory based on the game ball winning the normal variable winning ball device 6B (that is, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). Is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, based on the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type, This table is referred to in order to determine either “8R probability variation big hit” or “sudden probability variation big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 40D and 40E, 10 determination values are assigned to “suddenly probable big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes). In the jackpot type determination table 131b, five judgment values are assigned to the “sudden probability variation jackpot” (a ratio of 5/40). Will suddenly be determined to be a promising big hit). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol variation display is executed by starting the normal winning ball device 6A, the second variable symbol variation is started by winning the normal variable winning ball device 6B. Compared to the case where the display is executed, the ratio determined as “suddenly probable big hit” is high. Note that “sudden probability variation big hit” is assigned only to the first special symbol jackpot type determination table 131a, and “sudden probability variation big hit” is not assigned to the second special symbol big hit type determination table 131b (ie. It may be determined that “suddenly probable big hit” may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 40D and 40E, a sudden probability variation big hit as a first specific gaming state to which a predetermined amount of game value is given and an amount larger than the game value As the second specific gaming state to which the game value is given, there are cases where it is determined as “15R probability variation big hit” for 15 rounds and “8R probability variation big hit” for 8 rounds, and there is a change display of the first special symbol. Although the case where it is determined that the first specific gaming state is determined at a high rate when it is executed is shown, the gaming value to be given is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the allowable amount of the winning number (count number) of game balls to the big winning opening per round is increased as the gaming value is determined. Also good. Further, for example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the opening time of the big winning opening per game during the big hit may be determined as the gaming value. In addition, for example, even if the same 15 round big hits, the first specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening once per round and the second specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening multiple times per round It may be prepared to increase the gaming value of the second specific gaming state by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in any case of the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, when the big winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, all 15 rounds in the case of the first specific gaming state) In the case of the second specific gaming state, there is an undigested round remaining), and it is possible to execute an effect in such a manner as to inquire whether or not the jackpot continues further. And in the case of the first specific gaming state, all the 15 rounds have been finished internally, so the big hit game is finished, and in the case of the second specific gaming state, there remains an undigested round internally. For this reason, the jackpot game may be continued (the effect that the bonus winning opening is additionally started with a bonus after finishing the bonus hit of 15 times).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 40D and 40E, the types of big hits include “15R probability variation big hit”, “8R probability variation big hit”, and “sudden probability variation big hit”. In this embodiment, the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is three types of 15 rounds, 8 rounds, and 2 rounds. However, the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game. It is not limited to those shown in the form. For example, a 7R probability variable jackpot that is controlled for a seven-round jackpot game and a 5R probability variable jackpot that is controlled for a five-round jackpot game may be provided. In this embodiment, there are three types of jackpot types: “15R probability variation big hit”, “8R probability variation big hit”, and “sudden probability variation big hit”. The above jackpot type may be provided. Conversely, the jackpot type may be less than three types, for example, only two types may be provided as the jackpot type.

  The “15R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a 15-round big hit gaming state, and shifts to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, the high probability state and the high The state is also shifted (see steps S166 to S170 described later). Then, after the transition to the probability variation state, when the variation display is terminated 70 times, the high base state and the high probability state are terminated (see steps S168, S144, steps S170, S140).

  The “8R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot that is controlled to an eight-round jackpot gaming state, and shifts to a probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state ends (in this embodiment, the base is shifted to a high probability state and has a high base. The state is also shifted (see steps S166 to S170 described later). Then, after the transition to the probability variation state, when the variation display is terminated 70 times, the high base state and the high probability state are terminated (see steps S168, S144, steps S170, S140).

  The “sudden probability change big hit” is the number of times that the special winning opening is less than the “15R probability change big hit” or “8R probability change big hit” (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 seconds is twice). The jackpot allowed up to. In other words, when “suddenly promising big hit”, the game is controlled to a two round big hit gaming state. Also, in the case of “15R probable big hit” or “8R probable big hit”, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds, whereas in “sudden probable big hit”, the winning prize opening per round is long. The opening time is as short as 0.1 seconds, and it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to win a big prize during the big hit game. In this embodiment, after the sudden probability change big hit gaming state is finished, the state is changed to the probability change state (in this embodiment, the high base state is not changed and only the high probability state is changed). Then, after shifting to the probability variation state, when the variation display is terminated 70 times, the high probability state is terminated.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even in the case of “small hit”, the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds each, Similar control is performed. In the case of “small hit”, the game state does not change after the opening of the big winning opening twice, and the game state before “small hit” is maintained. By doing so, it is made impossible to recognize whether it is “suddenly promising big hit” or “small hit”, and the interest of the game is improved. As shown in this embodiment, when the big hit types are all probability variation big hits (in this embodiment, 15R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit), there is no need to provide a small hit. Good. In addition, when the big hit types are all probabilistic big hits as in this embodiment, when a small hit is provided, only sudden transition with high base state without high base state is performed. It is preferable to provide it (the opening pattern of the big prize opening is also the same for the case of sudden probability change big hit and small hit).

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with a random value of 1, which corresponds to each of “15R probability variation big hit”, “8R probability variation big hit”, and “sudden probability variation big hit” (big hit type Judgment value) is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matching jackpot type determination value.

  In this embodiment, as described above, only the jackpot type that shifts to the high probability state is included, but it is also possible to have a jackpot that does not shift to the high probability state (so-called normal jackpot). In addition, when transitioning to a high probability state, the high probability state is terminated by transitioning to the normal state triggered by a predetermined number of fluctuation displays. It is good also as a structure which complete | finishes a high-probability state by not changing a frequency | count limitation in a state but shifting to a normal state when a normal jackpot occurs.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to shift to the probability change state based on the type of jackpot that has occurred, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a specific area through which a game ball can pass is provided in the big winning opening, and when the game ball passes through the specific area during a big hit, the game moves to a probable change state, while the specific area is played during the big hit. It is also possible to shift to the normal state when does not pass. In that case, substantial probability variation big hit and non-probability big hit may be realized by changing the ease of passing of the game ball to the specific area according to the big hit type. For example, the easiness of passage of the game ball to the specific area may be changed by changing the opening time of the big winning opening according to the big hit type. Specifically, a big hit type with a long opening time of the big winning opening is set as a big hit (substantial probable big hit) that allows a game ball to easily pass to a specific area, and a big hit type with a short opening time of the big winning opening is set to a specific area. It is good also as a big hit (substantial non-probable big hit) that a ball does not easily pass.

  In the present embodiment, when a 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability state and a high base state. Although it is configured to end, the number of variable displays from the transition to each gaming state to the end may not be the same in the high probability state and the high base state. For example, the high base state may be ended when the display of fluctuation 70 times is finished after the end of the big hit, and the high probability state may be ended when the display of fluctuation 71 is finished.

  In the present embodiment, when a sudden probability change big hit occurs, the high base state is not changed to a high probability state after the big hit ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. Similarly to the occurrence of the probable big hit, it is possible to shift between the probable change state and the high base state. Moreover, it is good also as determining whether it transfers to a high base state based on the gaming state at the time of sudden probability change big hit. For example, if suddenly probable big hits occur in the high base state, it shifts to the high base state. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize which winning has occurred.

  41A to 41C are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and a random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C includes numerical values (determination values) to be compared with random number (random 2) values for variation pattern type determination, including normal CA3-1, normal CA3-2, A determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of super CA3-3, special CA4-1, special CA4-2, and non-reach CA3-4 is set.

  For example, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 41A used when the big hit type is “8R probability variable big hit” and the big hit type shown in FIG. The allocation of determination values for the variation pattern types of normal CA 3-1, normal CA 3-2, super CA 3-3 and non-reach CA 3-4 is different from the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132 B shown in FIG.

  As described above, when the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the big hit type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the big hit type. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied. In this embodiment, the non-reach CA 3-4, which is “sudden big hit”, is assigned to “8R probability variation big hit” or “15R probability variation big hit”, but is also assigned to “sudden probability big hit”. It may be assigned only to the 15R probability variation jackpot, or may be assigned only to the 8R probability variation jackpot.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 (A) and 41 (B), in this embodiment, in the case of “15R probability variation big hit” or “8R probability variation big hit”, a random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2) If the value of is 150 to 221, it can be seen that the variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

  In addition, for the super reach big hit, the variation pattern type with pseudo-continuity (variation pattern type including the variation pattern of Super PA3-3 and Super PA3-4) and the variation pattern type without super-continuity (Super PB3-3, Super It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of PB3-4. In this case, in both the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A for 8R probability variation big hit and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B for 15R probability variation big hit, the variation pattern type with super reach and quasi-ream, super reach and pseudo A variation pattern type not associated with a series is assigned.

  Further, in the big hit variation pattern type judgment table 132C used when the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, for example, when the big hit type such as special CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is other than “suddenly probable big hit”. A determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type to which no determination value is assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the type of big hit is “suddenly probable big hit”, the control is made to the big hit state with 15R positive variable big hit or 8R positive variable big hit. Can be determined for different variation pattern types.

  FIG. 41D is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D has a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41D, when it is determined to be a small hit, the case where the special CA4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type is shown. .

  42A to 42D are explanatory diagrams showing the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D. Among these, FIG. 42 (A) shows the losing variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than three. FIG. 42B shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135B used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. FIG. 42C is a high probability / high base state (a state from the end of big hit by 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit until the end of the 70th variation display) in the gaming state is a probability variation state. The deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C used in this case is shown. Further, FIG. 42D is used when the gaming state is a high probability / low base state (a state from the end of the big hit by sudden probability variation big hit to the end of the 70th variation display) of the probability changed state. A deviation variation pattern type determination table 135D is shown. The deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D have a plurality of types of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is an off-design. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 (C) and 42 (D), in this embodiment, even if the state is a probability variation state, a 15R probability variation big hit is displayed when the fluctuation display after the big hit end by the sudden probability variation big hit is performed. Compared to the case where the fluctuation display after the big hit is completed by the 8R probability variable big hit, the ratio of the fluctuation pattern with super reach is selected is higher. By doing so, in this embodiment, in the high probability state after the big hit by suddenly probable big hit, the player for the high probability state is displayed with high probability in the high probability state. Has increased expectations.

  In addition, a game for a big hit just before the end of the probability variation state is configured by increasing the ratio of the super reach from the variation display a predetermined number of times before the probability variation state ends (for example, five times before) to the last variation display. It is good also to raise a person's expectation. In this case, for example, at the end of the big hit, 75 times are set in a high probability number counter and a high base number counter described later (for example, 75 is set in both the high probability number counter and the high base number counter, and 75 times The high probability / high base state may continue until the fluctuation display is completed. The high probability count counter is set to 75, the high base count counter is set to 70, and the probability variation state ends. Control may be performed with a high probability / low base state from the previous to the last fluctuation display, and control is performed with a high probability / low base state from the five fluctuations before the probability variation state ends to the last fluctuation display. In this case, the variation pattern type determination for detachment is performed by checking the high probability flag and the high base flag according to the same control as that shown in this embodiment. Tables 135C and 135D may be selected (see steps S95, S96, S100, and S101). At the start of the variable display, the values of the high probability count counter and the high base count counter remain at a predetermined number (for example, 5). ) Or less (whether the remaining number of probability variation states is within a predetermined number), and if it is within a predetermined number (for example, 5), the super shown in FIG. The deviation variation pattern type determination table 135D with an increased reach ratio is selected. If the counter value is still greater than a predetermined number (for example, 5), the variation pattern type determination table 135C for deviation shown in FIG. May be selected. In addition, the control method in the case where it is configured to increase the ratio of the super reach from the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times before the probability variation state ends (for example, five times before) is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, 71 is set in the high probability count counter in the same manner as in this embodiment, and conversely, 66 is set in the high base count counter. Is controlled to a high probability / low base state, and by confirming whether the value of the high probability count counter is within 5 or less, the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D for loss are selected. May be. Further, the number of fluctuations after the big hit may not be determined based on the count value of the high probability number counter or the high base number counter, but may be determined using another counter. For example, a counter that counts the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game is provided, and whether the count value of the counter is within a predetermined range (for example, 71 to 75 or 66 to 71) is confirmed. It may be determined whether the state is between five changes before the end of the state and the last change display, and the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D may be selected. In addition, when the configuration is such that the high-probability / low-base state is controlled from the change display a predetermined number of times before the probability change state ends (for example, five times before) to the end of the last change display. In the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D for detachment may be selected according to the state of the high probability flag or the high base flag (see steps S95, S96, S100, and S101). ).

  In the example shown in FIG. 42, the case where the separate variation pattern type determination tables 135B to 135D are used for the case where the gaming state is the high base state and the case where the total pending storage number is 3 or more is shown. However, the common deviation variation pattern type determination table may be used in the case of the high base state and in the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. In the example shown in FIG. 42C, the common high base deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C is used regardless of the total number of pending storage, but the high base deviation variation pattern is used. As the type determination table, a plurality of variation pattern determination tables for deviation corresponding to the total number of pending storages (tables with different ratios of determination values) may be used.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type determination table for losing 135A used when the total pending storage number is less than 3, and the total pending storage number is 3 or more. Although the case where two types of tables are used, namely, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135B used in this case, the method of dividing the variation pattern type determination table for deviation is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. . For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2). For example, the deviation variation pattern type determination table may be used separately for each of the three, the total pending storage number, the four total pending storage number,... Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values stored in the total number of pending storages may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0-2, the total pending storage number 3, the total pending storage number 4,... May be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of deviation variation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of reserved storage, but a variation pattern for deviation according to the first and second reserved memory numbers. A plurality of type determination tables may be provided. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, a variation pattern type determination table for detachment prepared separately for each value of the first reserved memory number may be used (that is, the first reserved memory). Variation pattern type determination for deviation from 0 for number, 1 for 1st reserved memory, 2 for 1st reserved memory, 3 for 1st reserved memory, 4 for 1st reserved memory Each table may be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the first reserved memory number 0 to 2, the first reserved memory number 3, the first reserved memory number 4, and so on may be used. Even in this case, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are large (for example, 3 or more), it may be configured such that a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected. . Even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach as a specific variable display pattern.

  Note that “specific performance mode” refers to a variation pattern type or variation pattern that has a high expectation level for at least big hits, such as a fluctuation pattern with super reach, and can give the player a sense of expectation for the big hit. It is. In addition, the “expected degree (reliability) for the big hit” indicates an appearance rate (probability) that the big hit appears when variable display (for example, variable display with super reach) according to the specific performance mode is executed. ing. For example, the expectation degree of jackpot when the variable display with super reach is executed is determined as (the rate at which super reach is executed when the jackpot is determined) / (when the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot and lost) Is calculated by calculating the rate at which super reach is performed on both.

  Each of the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 2) value for variation pattern type determination, which is non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-. 3, a determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 42A and 42B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the normal state and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 230 to 251, it can be seen that variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed regardless of the total number of pending storage.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 42A and 42B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the normal state and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 1 to 79, it can be seen that the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least without the reach (without the specific effect such as the pseudo ream and the slide effect) regardless of the total number of the pending storage. Due to such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (displacement variation pattern type determination table 135A, 135B) includes at least one of the variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (variation pattern with reach). Regardless of the number of rights (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, combined reserved memory number) stored in the reserved memory means (first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer) for a part, Common determination values (1 to 79 in the example shown in FIGS. 42A and 42B) are assigned. Note that the “variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern” means, for example, a variable display result without a reach, a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect, as shown in this embodiment. Is a variable display pattern (fluctuation pattern) that is used when the big hit is not a big hit.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, the case where the common big hit variation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the current gaming state is shown. However, is the current gaming state in a probable variation state? Depending on whether it is a normal state, you may make it use the variation pattern type determination table for big hits prepared separately, respectively. Further, in this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the shortening variation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. 42B is selected to determine the variation pattern of the shortening variation. Although the case where it is configured so that there is a case is shown, the total number of reserved memories (the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number may be used) when the variation pattern of the shortening variation can be selected according to the current gaming state ) May be different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved memory is 3 (or when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is 2, for example), When the variation pattern type of shortening variation is selected by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for loss, and the gaming state is a high base state, the case of 1 or 2 having a smaller total number of pending storage However (or, for example, even when the number of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is smaller 0 or 1), the fluctuation pattern type determination table for shortening is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern of the shortening fluctuation. There may be cases where there are cases.

  43A and 43B are explanatory diagrams showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B determine the fluctuation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the fluctuation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3). Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table according to the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, super CA3-3, and non-reach CA3-4. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is either special CA4-1 or special CA4-2. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random pattern random number (random 3) value according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect symbol is Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” is included.

  In the example shown in FIG. 43A, the variation pattern type includes a normal CA3-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern with normal reach and pseudo-ream. Super CA3-3, which is a variation pattern type including a normal CA3-2, a variation pattern with super reach (which may be accompanied by a pseudo-ream together with super reach), and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only a sudden big hit The case where it classify | categorizes into the non-reach CA3-4 which is these is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 43B, as the variation pattern types, special CA4-1, which is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern, and special CA4-, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach, are used. 2 shows a case of classification into two. In FIG. 43B, the variation pattern type may be divided according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect, instead of being classified according to the presence / absence of reach. In this case, for example, the special CA 4-1 includes a special PG 1-1 and a special PG 2-1 that are fluctuation patterns not accompanied by a specific effect, and the special CA 4-2 includes a special PG 1-2, a special effect PG 1-2, and a special effect. You may comprise so that PG1-3 and special PG2-2 may be included.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 101. When it is determined that the variable display result is “out of”, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is based on a random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  45 and 46 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100. FIG. In the example shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 5 in response to variable display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 38, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Accordingly, when the production control microcomputer 115 receives the command 80XX (H), the production display device 5 controls the production display device 5 to start variable display of production symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. The effect control microcomputer 115 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H), and the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 115 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  Commands A001 and A002 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). In this embodiment, a big hit start designation command or a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command is used according to the type of big hit. Specifically, if it is “15R probability variation big hit” or “8R probability variation big hit”, the big hit start designation command (A001 (H)) is used, and if it is “sudden probability variation big hit” or “small hit”. For small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (A002 (H)) is used. The game control microcomputer 100 is configured to transmit a fanfare designation command for sudden probability change big hit start designation in the case of sudden probability change big hit, but not to send a fanfare designation command in case of small hit. Also good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a special winning opening) indicating a display of the number of times (round) indicated by XX while the special winning opening is open. Since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round, and the command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a special winning opening open designation command (A10A (H)) for designating round 10. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted, a different designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when ending the first round during the big hit game, a designation command (A201 (H)) after the big winning opening is designated to designate round 1, and when the tenth round during the big hit game is ended. Is sent after a special winning opening opening command (A30A (H)) for designating round 10.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game (a jackpot end designation command: an ending 1 designation command). The big hit end designation command (A301 (H)) is used when the big hit game by “15R probability variable big hit” or “8R probability variable big hit” is ended. Command A302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command: ending 2 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change big hit game. Note that the game control microcomputer 100 is configured to transmit an ending designation command for sudden probability variation big hit end designation in the case of sudden probability variation big hit, but not to send an ending designation command in case of small hit. Also good.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / high base state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state. Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / low base state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a high probability / low base state.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning designation command) that designates that the first start winning has been won. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning designation command) for designating that the second starting win has been won. In this embodiment, hereinafter, the first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command.

  The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number designation command) for designating a total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the total pending storage number. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage count subtraction designation command) that designates that the total pending storage count is decremented by one. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a total pending storage number subtraction designation command when subtracting the total pending storage number, but does not use the total pending storage number subtraction designation command. When subtracting the total pending storage number, a total pending storage number designation command for designating the total pending storage number after subtraction may be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which a combined pending storage number designation command for designating the combined pending storage number is transmitted as a command for designating the reserved storage count. It may be configured to transmit a command for designating the increased number of reserved memories. Specifically, when the first reserved memory increases, a first reserved memory number designation command for designating the first reserved memory number is transmitted, and when the second reserved memory increases, the second reserved memory number is designated. The second reserved memory number designation command may be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, a start winning designation command for designating which one of the normal winning ball device 6A and the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B has been won is transmitted as the hold memory information, and the total reserved memory number is also set. Although the case where the command for specifying the total reserved memory number to be specified is transmitted is shown, the effect control command transmitted as the reserved memory information is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second reserved memory number addition) indicating that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory number decreases, the reserved memory number subtraction designation command (the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or the command indicating that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has decreased) is transmitted. (Second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol design command) that indicates whether or not a big hit, a small hit or not, and a big hit type determination result among the winning determination results. is there. The command C6XX (H) is an effect control command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number is included in the winning determination result. (Variation category command).

  In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing (see FIG. 53), which will be described later, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not it will be a big hit, a small hit or not, Then, it is determined in which determination value range the random value for determining the variation pattern type falls. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, a value for designating a big hit or a small hit or a value for designating the type of a big hit is set, and control for transmission to the effect control microcomputer 115 is performed. Further, a value for designating a range of a determination value as a determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control for transmitting to the effect control microcomputer 115 is performed. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 115 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit or a small hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and the type of the big hit, Based on the variation category command, the variation pattern type can be recognized when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined determination value.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 47, in this embodiment, EXT data is set and a symbol designating command is transmitted according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made and the type of the big hit.

  For example, when it is determined that “out of the game” is given in the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol designating command (design 1 designating command) in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the “15R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol designation command (design 2 designation command) in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that “8R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol designation command (design 3 designation command) in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “suddenly promising big hit”, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol designating command (design 5 designating command) in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that the “small hit” is reached, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol designation command (design 6 designation command) in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Note that the EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to share data to be read when setting a symbol designating command and when setting a display result specifying command.

  48 and 49 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the variable category command. As shown in FIG. 48 and FIG. 49, in this embodiment, which gaming state is displayed, which display result is the display result of the special symbol or effect symbol, the random number for determining the variation pattern type at the start winning prize A value is set in the EXT data according to whether it is determined that any of the determination values falls within the range, and a variation category command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in the normal state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 103 first determines whether the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79. Determine whether or not. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category 1 command in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the non-reach CA2-1 variation pattern type is commonly assigned to the range of determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 115 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 based on the reception of the variation category 1 command. Next, when the variation pattern type determination random number is 80 to 89, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category 2 command in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the variation pattern type determination random number value is 90 to 99, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category 3 command in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 100 to 169, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category 4 command in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 170 to 199, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category 5 command in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the variation pattern type determination random number value is 200 to 214, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category 6 command in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 215 and 229, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category 7 command in which “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category 8 command in which “07 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total pending storage number. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 115 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is super CA2-7 based on the reception of the variation category 8 command.

  Note that the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 used for determining which of the above-mentioned variation categories belong are specifically shown in FIGS. 42 (A) and (B). This is derived by picking up values that can be boundaries of the range of determination values assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table for loss. This also applies to the subsequent fluctuation categories 9 to 12 and 21 to 29, and each fluctuation in the fluctuation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 41 (A) to (D) and FIGS. 42 (C) and 42 (D). A threshold value used for category determination is derived by picking up a value that can be a boundary of a range of determination values assigned to the pattern type.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is high probability / high base state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of winning effect processing described later, the CPU 103 first determines the random value for determining the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not 1 to 219. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-3), the CPU 103 performs the variation in which “08 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Send category 9 command. Next, the CPU 103 sets “09 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 220 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7). Send a variable category 10 command.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is high probability / low base state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 103 first determines the random number value for determining the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not 1 to 79. When the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 1 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1), the CPU 103 performs variation with “0A (H)” set in the EXT data. A category 11 command is transmitted. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA2-7), the CPU 103 sets “0B (H)” in the EXT data. Send a variable category 12 command.

  Even when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability / high base state or high probability / low base state), the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 may be assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251. Good. By doing so, a common determination value can be assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 regardless of the gaming state. For this reason, when executing the process of step S232 of the effect process at the time of winning to be described later, if it is out of place, the common determination process may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. In this case, the game state determination process in step S226 can be made unnecessary.

  Also, for example, if it is determined that the “8R probability variation big hit” is obtained at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 103 first determines whether the random number for determining the variation pattern type becomes 1 to 74. Determine whether or not. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 103 sets the variation category in which “10 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 21 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 103 sets “11 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 75 to 149 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A variation category 22 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 103 sets “12 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 150 to 241 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA3-3). A variable category 23 command is transmitted. Further, the CPU 103 sets “19 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 242 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA 3-4). The changed category 30 command is transmitted.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the “15R probability variation big hit” is reached at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 103 first determines whether the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38. Determine whether or not. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 103 sets the variation category in which “13 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 24 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 103 sets “14 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 39 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). Send a variation category 25 command. Next, the CPU 103 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 221 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3). A variation category 26 command is transmitted. Further, the CPU 103 sets “1A (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 222 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA 3-4). The changed category 31 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the winning odds suddenly become a big win at the start winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100. Determine. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-1), the CPU 103 sets the variation category in which “16 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 27 commands are transmitted. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-2), the CPU 103 sets the variation category in which “17 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 28 commands are transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit is made at the start winning, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  The effect control microcomputer 115 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. Then, the display state of the effect display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. To do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 100 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol every time there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 115.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the production control command, production control command data is output from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 via the relay board 77 by 1 byte by 8 parallel signal lines of the production control signals CD0 to CD7. In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 115 mounted on the effect control board 12 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 45 and FIG. 46, the variable pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed as variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol. An effect display that can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display 4B, and that produces an effect with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When controlling the production parts such as the device 5, the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the production control microcomputer 115 can be prevented from increasing.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, if the first start port switch 22A for detecting that the game ball has won the normal winning ball device 6A is turned on, that is, the start winning to the normal winning ball device 6A is made. If it has occurred, or if the second start port switch 22B for detecting that a game ball has won the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is turned on, that is, a start winning to the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B occurs. If so, start port switch passage processing is executed (steps S311 and S312). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start port switch 22A or the second start port switch 22B is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 100 is in a state where variable display of special symbols can be started, the game control microcomputer 100 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the combined hold storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the production control microcomputer 115, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 115 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 115 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 115 controls the effect display device 5 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 17 is driven to open the big prize opening. In addition, control is performed to transmit the special winning opening open designation command to the production control microcomputer 115, the execution time of the special winning opening open processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S306. To a value corresponding to (6 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for the big prize opening is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the command for opening a special prize opening is specified, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a special winning opening open designation command (A10A (H)) for designating round 10.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special prize opening opening process, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special prize opening is performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition, control is performed to transmit the designation command after the big hit release to the effect control microcomputer 115, and when all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S307 (this In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control for causing the effect control microcomputer 115 to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. Also, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a high probability flag or a high base flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 17 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for small hits is executed every time the big winning opening during the small hit game is opened. It is also a process to start.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the big prize opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. Update. In addition, when all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control for causing the microcomputer 115 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the first start port switch 22A is in an ON state (step S1211). If the first start port switch 22A is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to step S1222. If the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first reserved memory for counting the first reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is checked (step S1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S1222.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1213) and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1214). Further, the CPU 103 is an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. In step S1215, data indicating “first” is set.

  In this embodiment, when the first start port switch 22A is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the normal winning ball device 6A), data indicating “first” is set, and the first 2 When the start port switch 22B is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B), data indicating “second” is set. For example, the CPU 103 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first start port switch 22A is turned on in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area), 2 When the start port switch 22B is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating “second”. In this case, when there is no corresponding reserved storage, 00 (H) is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

  FIG. 52A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). As shown in FIG. 52 (A), an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. FIG. 52A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 52 (A), an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. Data indicating “first” or “second” is set in order of winning based on winning in the winning ball apparatus 6B. Therefore, the order of winning the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B is stored in the holding memory specifying information storage area (holding specifying area). Note that the reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 102.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 530 and a counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in a storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 52B) ( Step S1216). Note that in the process of step S1216, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the start-port switch passing process (at the time of start winning), but is extracted at the start of the variation of the first special symbol. May be. For example, the game control microcomputer 100 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 52B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 52 (B), a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 102.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning presentation process in which a variation display result and a variation pattern type when the variation based on the detected starting winning is subsequently performed are determined in advance at the starting winning (step S1217). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 115 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S1218), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 115. Control is performed (step S1219). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 115 (step S1220), and sets the value of the total pending storage number counter to the EXT data and sets the total pending storage number designation command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 115 (step S1221).

  Note that by executing the processing of steps S1218 and S1219, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 regardless of the gaming state (whether it is a high probability state, a high base state, or a big hit gaming state). Always sends both the symbol designating command and the variable category command to the production control microcomputer 115 each time a start winning is made to the normal winning ball apparatus 6A.

  In this embodiment, when the start winning to the normal winning ball apparatus 6A occurs by executing the processing of steps S1218 to S1221, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, the first start prize designation command A set of four commands, that is, a total pending storage number designation command, is transmitted in a batch within one timer interrupt.

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the second start port switch 22B is on (step S1222). If the second start port switch 22B is not in the ON state, the process is terminated as it is. If the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved memory for counting the second reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 is confirmed (step S1223). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1224), and the value of the aggregate reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1225). In addition, the CPU 103 sets data indicating “second” in an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) (step S1226).

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 530 and a counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 52B) ( Step S1227). In the process of step S1227, hardware Random random R (big hit determination random number), software random number big hit type determination random number (random 1), variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the start-port switch passing process (at the time of start winning), but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. May be. For example, the game control microcomputer 100 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes winning effect processing (step S1228). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 115 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S1229), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 115. Control is performed (step S1230). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 115 (step S1231), and sets the value of the total pending storage number counter to the EXT data and sets the total pending storage number designation command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 115 (step S1232).

  It should be noted that by executing the processing of steps S1229 and S1230, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 regardless of the gaming state (whether it is a high probability state, a high base state, or a big hit gaming state). Always sends both the symbol designating command and the variable category command to the production control microcomputer 115 every time a start winning is made to the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the start winning to the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B occurs by executing the processing of steps S1229 to S1232, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, the second start prize designation A set of four commands, that is, a command and a total pending storage number designation command, are transmitted in one timer interrupt.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing in steps S1217 and S1228. In the winning effect processing, the CPU 103 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S220). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, the type of the big hit is determined, Separately, at the timing when the game ball starts to win the normal winning ball device 6A or the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the winning display is started before the variable display based on the starting winning is started. By executing the time effect process, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the big hit or the small hit is made, and in which judgment value range the value of the big hit type or the variation pattern type determination random number falls. By doing so, the variation display result and variation pattern type are predicted in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and the effect control microcomputer is based on the determination result at the time of winning as will be described later. In 115, a continuous notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is displayed during the variation display of the effect symbol.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the normal jackpot determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 103 determines that the gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state. High probability / high base state and high probability / It is confirmed whether or not a high probability flag indicating that the low base state is included is set (step S221). If the high probability flag is set, the CPU 103 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variation displays will be executed after confirming whether or not the state is surely changed in step S221 at the time of the start winning, until the actual display of the variation based on the start winning is actually started. There is. For this reason, the game state has changed (for example, the start of change) from when it is confirmed whether or not it is in the probable variation state at step S221 at the time of starting winning, until when the fluctuation display based on the starting winning is actually started. If there is a 15R probability variation big hit before, an 8R probability variation big hit, or a sudden probability variation big hit, the normal state changes to the probability variation state. For this reason, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) do not necessarily match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the determination at the start winning prize is made based on the game state after the change. Also good.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (N in step S222), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 and FIG. ) And (C) are compared with the small hit determination values to confirm whether or not they match (step S223). In this case, when there is a start winning for the normal winning ball apparatus 6A (when the winning effect processing in step S1217 is executed), the CPU 103 determines a small hit determination table (first special determination table) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set for (for symbol). Also, when there is a start winning in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B (when the winning effect processing in step S1228 is executed), the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 103 sets EXT data “00 (H)” indicating “out of” in the symbol designation command. Is performed (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 103 performs processing for determining the current gaming state (step S225). In this embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state and a high base state (specifically, the high probability flag and the high base flag are set in step S225). Whether or not). In addition, after confirming whether or not the high probability state and the high base state are set in step S225 at the time of starting winning, until the display of fluctuation based on the starting winning is actually started, Multiple variable displays may be performed. Therefore, the game state after the start winning is confirmed in step S225 whether or not it is in the high probability state and the high base state until the actual display of variation based on the start winning is actually started. (For example, when a 15R probability change big hit, an 8R probability change big hit, or a sudden probability change big hit occurs before the start of fluctuation, there is a case where the normal state changes to the probability changed state). Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S225 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) do not necessarily match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the determination at the start winning prize is made based on the game state after the change. Also good.

  Then, the CPU 103 sets each threshold value for detachment according to the determination result of step S225 (step S226). In this embodiment, a threshold determination program for performing threshold determination in advance is incorporated, and by determining whether or not the threshold value is larger than the threshold value, the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within any determination value range. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data to be set in the variation category command shown in FIGS. 48 and 49 is determined.

  For example, when the CPU 103 determines that the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, the CPU 103 sets the threshold 219. In this case, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 219 in step S232 to be described later. Determines that “08 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 48). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold 219 (that is, 220 to 251), it is determined that “09 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 48).

  For example, when the CPU 103 determines that the gaming state is the high probability / low base state, the threshold value 79 is set. In this case, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 (that is, 1 to 79). Is determined to set “0A (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 48). If the threshold value is not 79 or less (that is, 80 to 251), it is determined that “0B (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 48).

  For example, if the CPU 103 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 103 sets the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 (that is, 1 to 79). Determines that “00 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 48). If the threshold value is 89 or less (that is, 80 to 89), it is determined that “01 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 48). If the threshold value is 99 or less (that is, 90 to 99), it is determined that “02 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 48). If the threshold value is 169 or less (that is, 100 to 169), it is determined that “03 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 48). If the threshold value is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), it is determined that “04 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 48). If the threshold is 214 or less (that is, 200 to 214), it is determined that “05 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 48). When the threshold value is 229 or less (that is, when it is 215 to 229), it is determined that “06 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 48). If the threshold value is not less than 229 (that is, 230 to 251), it is determined that “07 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 48).

  In the threshold determination example described above, 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 are determined in order from the smallest threshold value. It will never fall within the range below the previous order threshold. That is, after determining whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, when determining whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, it does not fall within the range of 1 to 79 that is equal to or less than the threshold value in the previous order. It is determined whether it is in the range. In this embodiment, the case where the threshold values are determined to be 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in order from the smallest value is shown. Conversely, 229, 214, You may determine with 199, 169, 99, 89, and 79. The same applies to the determination using other threshold values shown below.

  Note that the threshold value in the normal state (low probability / low base state) may always be set without determining the gaming state in step S225. Even in such a configuration, the range of determination values is shared by at least the variation pattern type that is “non-reach” and the variation pattern type that is “super-reach”. It can be determined whether or not it is “out of” or “out of super reach”.

  When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S223), the CPU 103 uses the EXT data “05 (H)” indicating “small hit” as a symbol designating command. Is set (step S227).

  Next, the CPU 103 sets a threshold for small hits (step S228). In this embodiment, the CPU 103 sets the threshold value 251 and determines in step S232 described later that the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is equal to or less than the threshold value 251 (1 to 251). It is determined that “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 49). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data “18 (H)” is set as it is without performing the threshold determination.

  When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 103 determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227. Is determined (step S229). In this case, when there is a start winning to the normal winning ball apparatus 6A (when the winning effect processing in step S1217 is executed), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type determination table (first special) shown in FIG. It is determined whether the big hit type is “15R probability variation big hit”, “8R probability variation big hit”, or “sudden probability variation big hit” using the symbol 131a. Further, when there is a start winning in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B (when the winning effect processing in step S1228 is executed), the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 131b is used to determine whether the jackpot type is “15R probability variation big hit”, “8R probability variation big hit”, or “sudden probability variation big hit”.

  Next, the CPU 103 performs processing for setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the symbol designation command (step S230). In this case, when it is determined that “15R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 103 performs processing for setting EXT data “01 (H)” indicating “15R probability variation big hit” in the symbol designation command. When it is determined that “8R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 103 performs processing for setting EXT data “02 (H)” indicating “8R probability variation big hit” in the symbol designation command. If it is determined that “suddenly probable big hit”, the CPU 103 performs processing for setting EXT data “04 (H)” indicating “suddenly probable big hit” in the symbol designation command.

  Then, the CPU 103 sets each threshold for jackpot according to the jackpot type determined in step S229 (step S231).

  For example, if the CPU 103 determines “8R probability variation big hit”, the threshold values 74, 149, and 241 are set. In this case, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 (that is, 1 to 74). Is determined to set “10 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 49). If the threshold value is 149 or less (that is, 75 to 149), it is determined that “11 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 49). If the threshold value is 241 or less (that is, 150 to 241), it is determined that “12 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 49). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold 241 (that is, if it is 242 to 251), it is determined that “19 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 49).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 103 determines that “15R probability variation big hit”, the thresholds 38, 79, and 221 are set. In this case, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 38 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 38 (that is, 1 to 38). Is determined to set “13 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 49). If the threshold is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), it is determined that “14 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 49). If the threshold value is 221 or less (that is, 80 to 221), it is determined that “15 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 49). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold 221 (that is, if it is 222 to 251), it is determined that “1A (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 49).

  Further, for example, if the CPU 103 determines that “suddenly probable big hit”, it sets the threshold 100. In this case, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 100 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value 100 (that is, 1 to 100). Is determined to set “16 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 49). If the threshold is not less than 100 (that is, 101 to 251), it is determined that “17 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 49).

  Next, the CPU 103 uses the threshold value set in steps S226, S228, and S231 and the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 to determine which value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is. It is determined whether it is within the range of the determination value (step S232).

  In steps S226, S228, and S231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, a variation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 41 and 42) is set. In step S232, the set variation pattern type is set. A determination table may be used to determine the range of the variation pattern type determination random number and which variation pattern type.

  Then, the CPU 103 performs processing for setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result to the variable category command (step S233). Specifically, the CPU 103 determines “00 (H)” to “0B (H)”, “10” as shown in FIGS. 48 and 49 according to which variation pattern type is determined in step S232. (H) ”to“ 1A (H) ”is set to the EXT data of the variable category command.

  In this embodiment, although the case where it is determined that the big win or the small win is determined in the determination at the time of winning, the range in which the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is uniformly determined is shown. When it is determined that the game is a big hit or a small hit, the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type may not be determined. Then, when a big win or a small win is received, a symbol designating command indicating that the determination at the time of winning is made may be transmitted, and a variation category command comprehensively indicating that the variation pattern type of a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. . For example, although the production control microcomputer 115 does not specifically indicate which variation pattern type, the variation indicated that it will be one of the big hit variation pattern types. A continuous notice effect described later may be executed based on the reception of the category command.

  54 and 55 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total number of reserved storage (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not been transmitted yet, control is performed to send the customer waiting demonstration designation command to the production control microcomputer 115 (step S51A), and the processing is performed. finish. For example, when the CPU 103 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S51A, the CPU 103 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. When the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demonstration request command is repeatedly set based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completed flag is set. Control should be performed so that the demo designation command is not transmitted. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completion flag may be reset when the next special symbol variation display is started.

  In step S51, the CPU 103 does not check the value of the total reserved memory number, but checks whether or not data is set in the first area of the reserved specific area. If it is not set, it may be determined that there is no reserved storage, and the process may proceed to step S51A.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the first data among the data set in the pending specific area (see FIG. 52A) is data indicating “first”. (Step S52). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not data indicating “first” (that is, data indicating “second”) (N in step S52), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol pointer (first Data indicating “second” is set in a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for one special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol (step S53). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating “first” (Y in step S52), the CPU 103 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S54). ).

  By executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, in this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in accordance with the start winning order in which the game balls have won the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. Alternatively, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in accordance with the start winning order in which the game balls have won the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. However, it may be configured to preferentially execute the variable display of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In this case, for example, when the state is shifted to the high base state, it is easy to start a winning in the normal variable winning ball device 6B provided with the variable winning ball device 6 and the second reserved memory is easily accumulated. The special symbol variation display may be executed with priority.

  In the case where the display is performed with priority on the display of the variation of the second special symbol, in the winning effect processing shown in FIG. Only the process of comparing with the value may be executed and may not be compared with the jackpot determination value in the high probability state (specifically, only the process of step S220 is executed, and the processes of steps S221 and S222 are performed) You may not do it). With such a configuration, when the display of the variation of the second special symbol is prioritized and executed, between the determination result of the jackpot in the determination at the time of winning and the determination result of the jackpot at the actual start of variation It is possible to prevent the deviation from occurring.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 determines each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1, and in the reserved specific area and the first reserved memory buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the reserved specific area and the second reserved memory buffer are shifted. To do.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 sets the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1. In addition, the CPU 103 adds the values (values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total reserved memory number = m (m = 2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. Store in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = m−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order. Further, the order in which the values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1-8.

  Then, the CPU 103 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

  Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 115 according to the current gaming state (step S60). In this case, when the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set and the high base flag indicating the high base state is set, the CPU 103 sets the high probability high base state background. Controls sending specified commands. Further, when only the high probability flag is set and the high base flag is not set, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a high probability low base state background designation command. Further, if neither the high probability flag nor the high base flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command.

  Specifically, when the CPU 103 transmits the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 115, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) is used. Set to pointer. And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when the change of the special symbol is started, the background control command, the change pattern command, the display result specifying command, and the total pending storage number subtraction specifying command are sequentially set for each timer interrupt. It is transmitted to the computer 115. Specifically, when the change of the special symbol is started, first, the background designation command is transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms elapses, the display result designation command is transmitted after elapse of 4 ms, and further after 4 ms elapses. A command for specifying the total pending storage number subtraction is transmitted. In addition, the symbol variation designation command (the first symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted when the special symbol variation starts, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is sent to the production control microcomputer 115.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is performed on the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, that is, “first” indicating that the process is performed on the first special symbol. Or data indicating “second” indicating that the process is performed on the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, that is, data indicating “second” indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol. Is set as a special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S310 can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads a random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the jackpot determination random number extracted in step S1216 or step S1227 of the start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The big hit determination module compares a big hit determination value or small hit determination value (see FIG. 40) determined in advance with a big hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a big hit or a small hit if they match. It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), the probability that the game state is a big hit than when the gaming state is non-probability change state (normal state) Is configured to be high. Specifically, a jackpot determination table at the time of probability change in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance (a table in which the value on the right side of FIG. 40A in the ROM 101 is set) and the number of jackpot determination values are variable. There is provided a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 40A in the ROM 101 are set) set to be smaller than the hour big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state, and when the gaming state is a probability variation state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in the state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any one of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 40A, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is a probable change state is determined by whether or not the high probability flag is set. The high probability flag is set when the gaming state shifts to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state ends. Specifically, it is determined to be “15R probability change big hit”, “8R probability change big hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Then, after the big hit game is over, it is reset when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (70 times in this embodiment).

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 103 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 40B and 40C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 40B and 40C, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the CPU 103 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. ) To determine whether or not to make a small hit. Further, when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. . If it is determined to be a small hit (step S62), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

  If the random R value does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step S75 as it is.

  In step S71, the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 103 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select a type corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the big hit type stored in the random number buffer area (“15R probability variation big hit”, “ 8R probability change big hit "or" sudden probability change big hit ") is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the big hit type determination random number extracted in step S1216 or step S1227 of the start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer, and determines the big hit type. Do. Also, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 40D and 40E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the rate at which suddenly probable big hits are selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 103 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is “15R probability variable big hit”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “8R probability variable big hit”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type. When the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, “04” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” which is a loss symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, one of “1”, “7”, and “9”, which is a big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “suddenly promising big hit”, “1” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “8R probable big hit” is decided, “7” is designated as a special symbol stop symbol. If “15R probability variation big hit” is determined, “9” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown, but the method for determining the jackpot type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is as follows. It is not limited to what is shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on a random number for determining the big hit type. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 uses the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. 41 (A) as tables used for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. ) To (C)) is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 41 (D) as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. )) Is selected (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the high base flag indicating the high base state is set (step S95). Note that the high base flag is set when the gaming state shifts to the probability changing state, and is reset when the high base state ends. Specifically, it is determined to be “15R probability variation big hit” or “8R probability variation big hit”, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Further, after the big hit game is over, it is reset when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (70 times in this embodiment).

  If the high base flag is not set (N in step S95), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set (step S96). If the high probability flag is not set (N in step S96), that is, if the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the total number of pending storage is 3 or more (step S97). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S97), the CPU 103 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135A for detachment as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. 42A) is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S97), the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern type for deviation as a table used to determine one of the plurality of variation pattern types. 135B (see FIG. 42B) is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the high probability flag is set (Y in step S96), that is, if the gaming state is a high probability / low base state, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. As a table used for this purpose, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135D (see FIG. 42D) is selected (step S100). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the high base flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (in this embodiment, the low probability / high base state is controlled). Therefore, if the high base flag is set, it is a high probability / high base state), and the CPU 103 uses the variation for outlier as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation patterns. The pattern type determination table 135C (see FIG. 42C) is selected (step S101). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  In this embodiment, when the processing of steps S95 to S101 is executed, and the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation for loss shown in FIG. The pattern type determination table 135B is selected. Further, when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, the variation pattern type determination table 135C for loss shown in FIG. 42C is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S102, which will be described later. If the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the process changes in step S105. Non-reach PA1-2 of shortening variation is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 44). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, a change display of the shortening variation may be performed. In this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation used in the high probability / high base state (see FIG. 42C) and the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storage ( Although the table is different from that shown in FIG. 42B), a common table may be used as the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is a high base state, when the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0 or 1), The change display of the shortening change may not be performed. In this case, for example, when the CPU 103 determines Y in step S95, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is substantially zero. The determination table 135A (see FIG. 42A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer), and performs the process of steps S92, S94, S98, S99, S100, or S101. By referring to the selected table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S102).

  Next, based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S102, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern determination table 137A, 137B (see FIG. 43) as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation patterns. ), One of the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A (see FIG. 44) is selected (step S103). Further, the random pattern 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S103. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S105). In the case where the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 103 uses the variation pattern determination random number counter to generate the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is also possible to extract the value directly from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 115 (step S106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined change pattern to the effect control microcomputer 115 (step S107).

  Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S109).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S95 to S102 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, a variation pattern type determination table for non-reach (including the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 shown in FIG. 42) and a variation pattern type determination table for reach (FIG. 42). Normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6, including a variation pattern type of super CA2-7) are prepared, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables with different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases. In this case, for example, whether the CPU 103 matches the determination value assigned to the common range of the reach determination table in determining whether the “reaching out of super reach” or “out of reach” occurs in the winning effect processing. By determining whether or not, it may be determined in advance whether or not to reach. In addition, considering that the execution ratio of the notice effect is reduced, as shown in this embodiment, the “super-reach out” is performed depending on the variation pattern type without performing the lottery process using the random number for reach determination. It is preferable that a continuous notice effect is performed by determining whether or not “non-reach” will occur.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing display result designation command transmission processing (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 103 transmits one of the presentation control commands (display result 1 designation to display result 6 designation) (see FIG. 45) according to the determined big hit type, small hit, and loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S118. When the big hit flag is set, according to the type of big hit, control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command when it is “15R probability variation big hit”, and when it is “8R probability variation big hit”, display result 3 Control to transmit the specified command is performed (step S112). Whether or not it is “15R probability variation big hit” is specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. Specifically, whether or not it is “8R probability variation big hit” is determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “02”. it can. Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command when it is not the probability variation big hit, that is, when the probability variation big hit is sudden (step S117).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N of step S110), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S118). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a display result 6 designation command (step S119). When the small hit flag is not set (N in Step S118), that is, when it is out of place, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (Step S120).

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S121).

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted (step S1121). Whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted is determined by, for example, transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command when transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command in step S1122 described later. It is sufficient to set whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set, and whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set in step S1121. Further, in this case, the set total pending storage number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is reset by special symbol stop processing or jackpot end processing, which will be described later, when the special symbol variation display is ended or when the big jackpot is ended. do it.

  Next, if the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the total pending storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 115 (step S1122).

  Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S1125). When the variable time timer times out (step S1126), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 115 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the high probability flag indicating the high probability state and the high base flag indicating the high base state if set (step S132). ), A control for transmitting a big hit start designation command to the production control microcomputer 115 is performed (step S133). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is “15R probability variation jackpot” or “8R probability variation jackpot”, a jackpot start designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. When the big hit type is sudden probability change big hit, a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) is transmitted. Whether the type of jackpot is “15R probability variation big hit”, “8R probability variation big hit” or “sudden probability variation big hit” is a data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 102 (stored in the big hit type buffer). Data).

  In addition, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 5 notifies that the big hit has occurred) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S134). Also, the number of times of opening the winning prize opening counter (for example, “15R probability variation big hit” is 15 times, “8R probability variation big hit” is 8 times, and “sudden probability variation big hit” is 2 times. ) Is set (step S135). The round time per round in the big hit game is also set. In the case of sudden probability variation big hit, the round time is set to 0.1 seconds, and in the case of 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit, 29 seconds is set as the round time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winner opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S136).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set (step S137). When the high probability flag is set (that is, when the probability variation state (high probability / high base state or high probability / low base state)), the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the high probability state is indicated. The value of the high probability count counter is decremented by 1 (step S138). When the value of the high probability count counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 103 resets the high probability flag (step S140). If the high probability flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S141.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base flag indicating that the high base state is set (step S141). When the high base flag is set (that is, in the case of a high probability / high base state), the value of the high base number counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the high base state is decremented by 1 ( Step S142). When the value of the high base number counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S143), the CPU 103 resets the high base flag (step S144). Then, the process proceeds to step S145. If the high base flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S145 as it is.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S145). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 transmits a small hit / suddenly probable big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 115 (step S146). Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 5 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S147). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S148). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S308) (step S149).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S145), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S150).

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the big hit end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S161), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, in the case of 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit, a big hit end designation command is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 5 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the processing is ended.

  In step S164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 103 checks whether the big hit type is a 15R probability variable big hit or an 8R probability variable big hit (step S166). Whether or not it is a 15R probability variation big hit, an 8R probability variation big hit or a sudden probability variation big hit, specifically, the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”, “02” or It can be determined by checking whether it is “04” or not. If it is 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the time reduction flag to shift the gaming state to the time reduction state (step S167) and sets 70 to the high base number counter (step S168). Further, the high probability flag is set to shift the gaming state to the probability change state (step S169), and 70 is set to the high probability number counter (step S170). Then, the process proceeds to step S171. If it is neither 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit (that is, if sudden probability variation big hit), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S169.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S171).

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 115 (specifically, effect control CPU 120) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 12. The effect control CPU 120 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) is performed (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 5 is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the fourth symbol process (step S706). In the 4th symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (4th symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 5 are selected. The display control of the 4th symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing effect control commands received from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 45 and 46) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is. Note that the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

  63 and 64 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis processing (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 checks the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the effect control CPU 120 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 6 designation command) in the RAM. Is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (command A001 (H)) (step S621), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) (step S623), the production control CPU 120 sets a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag. (Step S624).

  If the received effect control command is one of the symbol designation commands (step S651), the effect control CPU 120 uses the received symbol designation command for the first time in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. (Step S652).

  FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the command storage area at the start winning prize. As shown in FIG. 65, in the start winning command storage area, areas (storage areas 1 to 8) corresponding to the maximum value of the total pending storage number (8 in this example) are secured. In this embodiment, as shown in steps S1218 to S1221 and S1229 to S1232 of the start port switch passing process in FIG. 51, when there is a start winning to the normal winning ball device 6A or the normal variable winning ball device 6B. In one timer interruption, four commands, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a start prize designation command (a first start prize designation command or a second start prize designation command), and a total pending storage number designation command are set. Sent. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 65, in each of the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, a start prize designation command, and a combined pending storage number designation command can be stored in association with each other. Thus, a storage area is secured.

  In this embodiment, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 stores commands in the first storage area that is vacant in the start winning command storage area in the order received. In this embodiment, the command transmission is performed in the order of the symbol designation command, the variation category command, the start winning designation command, and the total pending storage number designation command within one timer interruption. As shown in FIG. 65, each of the storage areas 1 to 8 is stored in the order of a symbol designation command, a variation category command, a start winning designation command, and a combined pending storage number designation command (in FIG. 65, An example in which commands are stored in the storage areas 1 to 5 is shown).

  In the example shown in FIG. 65, a total pending storage number designation command (7) that designates the total pending memory number 7 in the storage area in which up to seven pending memories have occurred in the previous fluctuation display and the latest command is stored. C207 (H)) is stored, and thereafter, the storage state of the command storage area at the time of the start winning prize is shown in the situation where one hold memory is consumed and the variable display based on the second hold memory is started. .

  In addition, each command stored in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 65 is displayed in step S663, which will be described later, every time a change display of the effect symbol is started (every time a total pending storage number subtraction designation command is received). It is deleted from what is stored in the first storage area 1, and the contents of the start winning command storage area are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 65, when a new effect symbol variation display is started, each command stored in the storage area 1 is deleted and each command stored in the storage area 2 is stored. Each command stored in the storage area 3 is shifted to the storage area 2 and each command stored in the storage area 4 is shifted to the storage area 3 and stored in the storage area 5. Each command is shifted to the storage area 4. It should be noted that the timing at which each command is deleted may be during the effect symbol variation start process, which will be described later, at the timing at which the effect symbol variation display is started.

  In this embodiment, when a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a startup prize designation command, and a combined pending storage number designation command received when a starting prize is generated are comprehensively expressed, Say. Further, among the commands at the time of starting winning, a starting winning designation command and a combined pending storage number designation command which are commands for designating information capable of recognizing that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has increased, When expressed in a comprehensive manner, it is also called reserved storage information. In addition, a symbol designation command which is a command indicating whether or not the big hit or the small hit is determined in the winning effect processing (see FIG. 53) at the start winning, the determination result of the big hit type, and the determination result of the variation pattern type, When the variable category command is comprehensively expressed, it is also referred to as a winning determination result designation command or determination result information.

  If the received effect control command is any variation category command (step S653), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation category command in each storage area 1 of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Are stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designating command is stored (step S654A). Then, a variable category command reception flag indicating that the variable category command has been received is set (step S654B).

  If the received effect control command is the first start winning designation command (step S655), the effect control CPU 120 increases the hold display in the combined hold storage display unit 18c by one, and updates the combined hold storage number display ( Step S656A). The received first start winning designation command is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command and the variable category command are stored among the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Store (step S656B).

  If the received effect control command is the second start winning designation command (step S657), the effect control CPU 120 increments the hold display in the total hold memory display unit 18c by one, and updates the total hold memory number display ( Step S658A). The received second start winning designation command is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command and variable category command are stored among the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Store (step S658B).

  If the received presentation control command is a combined pending storage number designation command (step S659), the presentation control CPU 120 uses the received total pending storage count designation command in each start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Of the storage areas 1 to 8, the latest symbol designation command, variation category command, and start winning designation command are stored in the storage area (step S660).

  If the received effect control command is a total pending storage number subtraction designation command (step S661), the effect control CPU 120 erases the first on-hold display in the total on-hold storage display unit 18c and sets the remaining on-hold display to 1. Shifting is performed one by one, and the total pending storage number display in the total pending storage display unit 18c is updated (step S662). For example, when the first to fifth hold displays of the combined hold storage display section 18c are lit up, the first hold display is deleted when the total hold storage number subtraction designation command is received. At the same time, the second hold display is shifted to the first display area, the third hold display is shifted to the second display area, and the fourth display is displayed. The held display that has been displayed is shifted to the third display area, and the held display that has been displayed fifth is shifted to the fourth display area. Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts display of active display (step S662a).

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 deletes the data in the storage area 1 in the start winning command storage area, and shifts and stores the remaining data (step S663).

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 120 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S684). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 performs any one of steps S800 to S810 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 5 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbols is realized. However, control relating to variable display of the effect symbols synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. It should be noted that the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed depending on which representation control process processing is performing the variation display of the representation symbol.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 100. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804), and the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the small hit display process (step S808) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800). .

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 5 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. When the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Small hit display process (step S808): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 5 of the occurrence of the small hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening process (step S809).

  Small hit opening process (step S809): A process for confirming the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there is still a remaining opening, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit display process (step S808). When all the openings are finished, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect process (step S810).

  Small hit end effect process (step S810): In the effect display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the small hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted even when the power failure is restored (see step S44). However, as shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the variation pattern command has been received, the transition to the production symbol variation start processing is started and the variation display of the production symbol is started. Therefore, if the display result designation command is received without receiving the variation pattern command, the variation of the representation symbol The display will not start.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8001). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect symbol display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step S8002 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Design) is determined (step S8002). That is, by the execution control CPU 120 executing the process of step S8002, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. A display result determining means for determining (design) is realized. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120, in step S8002, uses the chance symbol pattern (for example, “223” or “445” as the temporary stop pattern in the pseudo-ream). , A combination of symbols that are not reach, but one symbol is shifted from one symbol, or a combination of symbols including special images that may not be displayed normally (may be images other than numbers). Is also determined.) When it is determined in step S8002 that the effect control CPU 120 executes the continuous effect of the effect mode of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, the so-called chance symbol symbol is used as the stop symbol of the effect symbol. (For example, a combination of symbols that are not reachable, such as “223” and “445”, but that is not one reach and one symbol is shifted). The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined effect stop symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8002, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

  FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 5. In the example shown in FIG. 69, when the received display result designation command indicates “15R probability variation big hit” or “8R probability variation big hit” (the received display result designation command designates display result 2 designation command or display result 3 designation). In the case of a command), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of effect symbols in which three symbols are the same as the stop symbol. It should be noted that the determination ratio of the stop symbol may be varied depending on whether it is “15R probability variation big hit” or “8R probability variation big hit”. For example, in the case of “15R probability variation big hit”, the ratio for determining the combination of production symbols in which the three symbols are the same odd number is increased (or the ratio to be decided is 100%), and “8R probability variation big hit” is set. In some cases, the ratio for determining the combination of performance symbols in which the three symbols are the same even number may be increased (or the ratio to be determined is 100%).

  Further, when the received display result designation command indicates “suddenly probable big hit” or “small hit” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 5 designation command or a display result 6 designation command), The effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as the stop symbol. In the case of “out of” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 5 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol.

  The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  In addition, as for the effect symbols, a stop symbol reminiscent of a big hit (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right are all the same symbols) is called a big hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that recalls a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode and change pattern of the active display (step S8003a). In this embodiment, the active display change effect that changes the display mode of the active display during the change of the effect symbol, and the change of the display mode of the active display (and the display mode after the change when changed) are suggested. Suggestion effects can be performed. For example, the active display change that changes the display mode of the active display after the suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display changes (and the display mode after the change when changed) is executed at a predetermined timing. Production is performed.

  In this embodiment, the suggestion effect is always executed before the active display change effect is executed. However, the active display change effect is not always executed after the suggestion effect is executed. That is, there are a case where the display mode of the active display changes after the suggestion effect is executed and a case where the display mode of the active display does not change although the suggestion effect is executed. Hereinafter, the suggestion effect in which the display mode of the active display changes after execution of the effect is also referred to as a true suggestion effect, and the suggestion effect in which the display mode of the active display does not change after execution of the effect is also referred to as a false suggestion effect. Since the true suggestion effect and the false suggestion effect are executed according to a common effect mode, it cannot be determined whether or not the display mode of the active display changes until the effect ends.

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the execution timing of the active display change effect and the suggestion effect. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70, the active display change effect and the suggestive effect are generated at the first timing after the start of fluctuation and before the start of super reach and at the second timing after the start of super reach and before the stop of fluctuation. It is feasible. Note that the first timing and the second timing are not limited to the example illustrated in FIG. 70, and any method can be used as long as the relationship that the second timing is later than the first timing is maintained. It may be a proper timing. For example, both the first timing and the second timing may be set before the start of super reach, or both may be set after the start of super reach. In addition, the active display change effect and the suggestion effect may be executable not only at the two timings of the first timing and the second timing but also at three or more timings.

  In step S8003a, first, the final display mode of active display is determined using the final display mode determination table. In this embodiment, it is possible to change the display mode of active display a plurality of times by executing the active display change effect a plurality of times. The final display mode of the active display indicates what display mode is finally displayed (that is, at the end of the change) after one or a plurality of changes or without any change.

  FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a final display mode determination table. In the final display mode determination table, a determination corresponding to the final display mode is made according to the variation pattern (that is, “other than super-reach (out)”, “out of super reach”, or “super reach big hit”). Although values are assigned, in the example shown in FIG. 71, the ratio of assigned decision values is shown for the sake of simplicity. The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the final display mode, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  In this embodiment, the display mode of the active display is “normal mode (white)”, “first display mode (blue)”, “second display mode (green)”, and “third display mode (red)”. Although it can be any, determining that the final display mode is “normal mode (white)” means that the active display change effect is not executed. Further, determining that the final display mode is “normal mode (white)” means that the true suggestion effect in which the display mode of the active display changes after the effect is not executed. However, even if the final display mode is determined as “normal mode (white)”, the false suggestion effect in which the display mode of the active display does not change after the effect can be executed.

  According to the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 71, the final display is performed in descending order of the advantage of the variation pattern (that is, in the order of “Super reach big hit”> “Super reach out”> “Other than super reach (out)”). The proportion determined in the order of “third display mode (red)”> “second display mode (green)”> “first display mode (blue)”> “normal mode (white)” is increased. A judgment value is set. That is, when the final display mode is determined to be other than “normal mode (white)” and the active display change effect is executed, the player has higher expectation, and the final display mode is “third display mode (red)”. ">" Second display mode (green) ">" first display mode (blue) "in order of expectation. By comprising in this way, it can be made to be interested about what display mode an active display changes with whether an active display change effect is performed, and an interest can be heightened.

  In step S8003a, when the final display mode of active display is determined, the change pattern of active display is determined using the change pattern determination table based on the determined final display mode.

  FIG. 72A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a first change pattern determination table (without super reach) used for a variation pattern that does not include super reach. FIG. 72B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a second change pattern determination table (with super reach) used for a variation pattern including super reach. As shown in FIG. 70, in this embodiment, since the second timing is set after the start of super reach, when there is a variation pattern that does not include super reach, whether or not there is a change in active display at the second timing, etc. A first change pattern determination table (without super reach) in which determination is omitted is used. Note that the second timing is not limited to the example shown in this embodiment, and may be any timing as long as it is after the first timing. Therefore, when the second timing is not set after the start of super reach. Even if the variation pattern does not include super reach, it is possible to determine whether or not there is a change in active display at the first timing and the second timing.

  In the first change pattern determination table (without super reach) shown in FIG. 72A, the timing at which the active display change effect can be executed is only the first timing, so the final display mode is determined other than the normal mode (white). In any case, the change pattern changes to the final display mode at the first timing. For example, when the final display mode is the first display mode (blue), the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode (white) to the first display mode (blue) at the first timing at a rate of 100%. The change pattern 1-2 in which the active display change effect is performed is determined. In the change pattern 1-2, a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode (white) to the first display mode (blue) is executed prior to the active display change effect.

  When the final display mode is the second display mode (green), the active display mode changes from the normal mode (white) to the second display mode (green) at the first timing at a rate of 100%. The change pattern 1-3 in which the display change effect is executed is determined. In the change pattern 1-3, prior to the active display change effect, a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode (white) to the second display mode (green) is executed. When the final display mode is the third display mode (red), the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode (white) to the third display mode (red) at the first timing at a rate of 100%. The change pattern 1-4 in which the active display change effect is executed is determined. In the change pattern 1-4, a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode (white) to the third display mode (red) is executed prior to the active display change effect. Thus, in this embodiment, in addition to the change in the display mode of the active display, the display mode after the change when changed is suggested by the suggestion effect.

  When the final display mode is the normal mode (white), that is, when the display mode of the active display does not change, the change pattern 1-1 in which the active display change effect is not executed at the first timing is determined at a rate of 100%. Is done. In the change pattern 1-1, since the display mode of the active display is not changed at the first timing, the false suggestion effect (for example, the display mode of the active display is changed from the normal mode (white) to the first display mode (blue). Suggesting change). "(False suggestion) at the first timing and the second timing of the first change pattern determination table (without super reach) shown in FIG. 72 (A) and the second change pattern determination table (with super reach) shown in FIG. 72 (B). The description “effect” means that a false suggestion effect can be executed at the timing. Whether or not the false suggestion effect is actually executed is determined in step S8003b described later.

  In the second change pattern determination table (with super reach) shown in FIG. 72B, whether or not there is a change in active display between the first timing and the second timing, and the display mode after the change when changing according to each change pattern , And whether or not the false suggestion effect can be executed.

  For example, when the final display mode is the third display mode (red), the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode (white) to the first display mode (blue) at the first timing at a rate of 30%. The change pattern 2-7 changes from the first display mode (blue) to the third display mode (red) at the second timing. In addition, at a rate of 30%, the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode (white) to the second display mode (green) at the first timing, and from the second display mode (green) to the third display at the second timing. The change pattern 2-8 is changed to the aspect (red). In addition, the display mode of the active display is determined to be the change pattern 2-9 that changes from the normal mode (white) to the third display mode (red) at the second timing at a rate of 30%. Further, the display mode of the active display is determined as the change pattern 2-10 that changes from the normal mode (white) to the third display mode (red) at the first timing at a rate of 10%.

  In the change pattern 2-7, a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode (white) to the first display mode (blue) is executed prior to the active display change effect at the first timing, Prior to the active display change effect at the second timing, a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the active display changes from the first display mode (blue) to the third display mode (red) is executed. Moreover, in the change pattern 2-8, the suggestion effect which suggests that the display mode of an active display changes from a normal mode (white) to a 2nd display mode (green) is performed prior to the active display change effect at the first timing. Then, prior to the active display change effect at the second timing, a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display changes from the second display mode (green) to the third display mode (red) is executed.

  In the change pattern 2-9, since the display mode of the active display is not changed at the first timing, the false suggestion effect (for example, the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode (white) to the first display mode (blue). Suggesting that the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode (white) to the third display mode (red) prior to the active display change effect at the second timing. Is executed. Moreover, in the change pattern 2-10, the suggestion effect which suggests that the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode (white) to the third display mode (red) is executed prior to the active display change effect at the first timing. Is done. At the second timing of the change pattern 2-10, the display mode of the active display is not changed, but since the display is already displayed in the third display mode with the highest expectation level, the false suggestion effect cannot be executed. .

  A characteristic feature of the second change pattern determination table (with super reach) shown in FIG. 72B is that, at the second timing, the display mode of the active display is changed from the normal mode (white) to the first display mode (blue). That is, it is configured not to be determined as a change pattern 2-3 that changes. In this embodiment, since the second timing is set after the start of super reach, it can be said that the expectation for the big hit is increasing. However, at such timing, if the first display mode (blue) with low expectation is changed, it is suggested that the possibility of a big hit is low, and the player may be awakened. is there. Therefore, at the second timing, after executing the suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode (white) to the first display mode (blue), the active display change effect that changes the display mode is performed. By configuring so that the change pattern 2-3 to be executed is not determined, at the timing when the expectation for the big hit is increasing, it is possible to arouse the player by suggesting that the possibility of a big hit is low Can be prevented. Since the change pattern 2-3 is not determined, the change pattern 2-3 may not be provided in the second change pattern determination table (with super reach) from the beginning.

  In this embodiment, when the false suggestion effect is executed at a feasible timing, the false suggestion effect suggesting that the active display changes to a display mode having a higher one-step expectation level than the current display mode is executed. Is configured to do. For example, at the second timing of the change pattern 2-2, a false suggestion effect that suggests that the active display changes from the current first display mode (blue) to the second display mode (green) is executable. . Then, when executing the false suggestion effect at the second timing of the change pattern 2-1, the false suggestion effect suggesting that the active display changes from the normal mode (white) to the first display mode (blue) is executed. Will do. However, at the second timing when the sense of expectation for the big hit is increasing, the possibility of a big hit is low when the suggestive effect suggesting that the first display mode (blue) with a low degree of expectation is executed is executed. It is suggested that the player may be awakened. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the change pattern 2-1, execution of a false suggestion effect that suggests a change to the first display mode (blue) at the second timing is prohibited.

  In this embodiment, the change suggestion 2-3 is not determined as the change suggestion 2-3 in which the true suggestion effect that suggests the change to the first display mode (blue) is performed at the second timing. The execution of the active display change effect that changes to the first display mode (blue) at the second timing by prohibiting the execution of the false suggestion effect that suggests the change to the first display mode (blue) at the second timing. And restricting the execution of the suggestive effect that suggests changing to the first display mode (blue). That is, at the second timing, only the suggestion effect that suggests changing to either the second display mode (green) or the third display mode (red) having a higher expectation than the first display mode (blue) is executed. It is configured to be. By comprising in this way, it can prevent that the interest of a game falls.

  In this embodiment, when the final display mode of the active display has a high expectation such as the second display mode (green) or the third display mode (red), the second timing is higher than the first timing. The ratio of changing to the final display mode is increased. Specifically, when the final display mode is the third display mode (red), the rate of change to the third display mode (red) at the second timing is 90% (change pattern 2- 7 to 2-9), the rate of change to the third display mode (red) at the first timing is 10% (change pattern 2-10). By configuring in this way, it is often suggested to change to a display mode with a higher expectation level than the first timing at the second timing, and to suggest a change, and to improve the expectation at the second timing. it can.

  In this embodiment, the false suggestion effect is configured to suggest that the active display changes to a display mode in which the expectation level is higher by one level than the current display mode. It may be suggested that the display mode is changed to a higher display mode. For example, in the second timing of the change pattern 2-5, etc., the true suggestion effect suggesting that the expectation level changes from the normal mode (white) to the display mode higher than the second display mode (green). This is because, if there is no false suggestive effect that suggests the same change, it is determined that the change will be made when the effect is started. In the case of such a configuration, the change pattern 2-1 prohibits the execution of the false suggestion effect that suggests changing to the first display mode (blue) at the second timing, while the second display mode ( The execution of the false suggestion effect that suggests changing to the third display mode (red) may be allowed. In addition, in the case where the false suggestion effect suggesting that the degree of expectation changes to a display mode that is higher by two or more levels can be executed, the final display mode determined (or after the change suggested by the suggestion effect executed later) It is desirable to limit the execution of the false suggestion effect that suggests a change to a display mode with a higher expectation than the display mode of For example, when the final display mode is the second display mode (green), if a false suggestion effect that suggests changing to the third display mode (red) at the first timing is executed, the second display is performed at the second timing. This is because a true suggestion effect that suggests changing to a mode (green) is executed, and the player may feel that the sense of expectation has been lowered.

  In the example shown in FIG. 72 (B), if the final display mode is the same, it is configured such that there is no great difference in expectation even if the change pattern is different. However, the configuration is not limited to this. Even if the final display mode is the same, the degree of expectation may be different if the change pattern is different. For example, it can be realized by adopting a configuration in which the change pattern is determined at a different rate according to the variation pattern instead of or in addition to the final display mode.

  When the final display mode and the change pattern of the active display are determined in step S8003a, the effect control CPU 120 uses the false suggestion effect execution determination table to execute the false suggestion effect at every timing at which the false suggestion effect can be executed. It is determined whether or not (step S8003b). For example, when the change pattern 2-1 is determined, it is determined whether or not the false suggestion effect is executed at the first timing.

  FIG. 72C is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a false suggestion effect execution determination table. In the example shown in FIG. 72 (C), the first timing and the second timing are configured such that the ratio of executing the false suggestion effect is different. Specifically, the second timing is configured such that the ratio of executing the false suggestion effect is lower than that of the first timing. With this configuration, attention can be paid to the suggestion effect executed at the second timing.

  When the presence / absence of execution of the false suggestion effect is determined in step S8003b, the effect control CPU 120 uses the suggestion effect mode determination table to determine the effect mode of the suggestion effect (step S8003c). In this embodiment, the first mode and the second mode can be selected as the presentation mode of the suggestion effect, and the character A appears in the suggestion effect of the first mode (see FIGS. 76 (a1) to (a4)). ), The character B appears in the suggestion effect of the second mode (see FIGS. 76 (b1) to (b4)).

  FIG. 72D is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the suggestion effect mode determination table. The example shown in FIG. 72D is configured to determine the production mode at different ratios depending on whether the suggested production to be executed is the true suggestion production or the false suggestion production. Specifically, the ratio determined to the first mode is high in the true suggestion effect, and the ratio determined to the second mode is high in the false suggestion effect. By being configured in this way, since the ratio of change in the display mode of the active display varies depending on the effect mode of the suggestion effect, it is possible to focus on the effect mode of the suggestion effect and increase the interest of the game. it can.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it is comprised so that the expectation degree which is a true suggestion effect may differ in the case of the production | presentation aspect of a suggestion effect in the case of a 1st aspect, and the case of a 2nd aspect, Or, in addition, the degree of expectation that is a big hit may be different. For example, in addition to whether it is a true suggestion effect or a false suggestion effect, it can be realized by adopting a configuration in which the effect mode of the suggestion effect is determined at a different rate depending on the variation pattern.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern and the effect to be executed (step S8004). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts a process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step S8005).

  FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data that is referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation aspect (including active display change effect and suggestive effect aspects) constituting the variation aspect during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbol. Has been. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 5 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table, and performs control to display the effect design in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 73 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 12. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  In addition, the CPU 120 for effect control is based on the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, and sound number data 1). Control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect part is executed (step S8006). For example, in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 5, a command is output to the VDP 109. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect pattern to be variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step S8007). Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8008).

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol changing process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 120 first decrements the value of the process timer by 1 (step S8101) and decrements the value of the variation time timer by 1 (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S8105).

  Next, if the change time timer has timed out (Y in step S813), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change stop process (step S803) (step S8124). ).

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, first, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that a stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In this embodiment, when a big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Accordingly, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, and therefore the processing of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed. Instead, the process proceeds to step S8305.

  When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (out of symbol, jackpot symbol) (step S8302).

  When the big win symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y of step S8303), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S8304) and receives the big hit start designation command. It is checked whether a big hit start designation command reception flag indicating that a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set or not (step S8305). . When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306), and responds to the fanfare production. A process table is selected (step S8307). When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / suddenly probable big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the set flag.

  Then, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) According to the data 1, the movable member control data 1), the effect device (the effect display device 5 as an effect part, various lamps as an effect part, the speaker 27 as an effect part, and the movable member 78 as an effect part and the effect The blades 79a and 79b) are controlled (step S8309). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S8310).

  When neither the big winning symbol nor the small winning symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 120 resets a predetermined flag. (Step S8311). For example, the effect control CPU 120 resets the first symbol variation designation command reception flag and the second symbol variation designation command reception flag. The effect control CPU 120 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process or the fourth symbol process (for example, as shown in step S811 in FIG. 67, the variation pattern). The fluctuation pattern command reception flag may be reset immediately after confirming the command reception flag). However, for example, because the symbol variation designation command is referred to in both the effect control process and the fourth symbol process, as shown in this embodiment, the effect symbol variation stop process or the like at the end of the variation. It is desirable to reset at the end of the big hit or at the end of the big hit effect processing. Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8312).

  FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the active display change effect and the suggestive effect in this embodiment. 76 (a1) to (a4), the active display change effect in which the active display changes from the normal mode (white) to the first display mode (blue), and the active display in the normal mode (prior to the active display change effect) An example is shown in which the suggestion effect (true suggestion effect) of the first aspect that suggests changing from the white) to the first display aspect (blue) is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (a1), when the variable display is started, the active display is displayed on the active display portion 18d (the active display in the normal state is displayed in FIG. 76 (a1)). Here, at the first timing, the character A (in FIG. 76 (a2)) holding the blue shining sphere 18e (simply displayed as “blue” in FIG. 76 (a2)) has a round head. A suggestion effect in which 18f (displayed as “A”) appears is executed (FIG. 76 (a2)).

  In the example shown in FIG. 76 (a2), it is suggested that the active display changes to the first display mode (blue) when the sphere held by the character is a sphere 18e that shines in blue. In addition, when it is suggested that it changes to a 2nd display mode (green) or a 3rd display mode (red), the sphere shining green and the sphere shining red are hold | maintained. In addition, when the suggestion effect is executed in the first mode in which the character A appears, the display mode of the active display changes compared to when the suggestion effect is executed in the second mode in which the character B described later appears. It is suggested that the ratio is high (that is, the ratio that is a true suggestion effect is high).

  In this embodiment, even when suggesting which display mode the active display changes to, the first mode in which the character A appears or the second mode in which the character B appears is executed (however, The mode of the held sphere is different). That is, regardless of which display mode is suggested, the suggestion effect is configured to be executed in a mode at least partially in common. Therefore, when the character A or the character B appears, it can be easily recognized that the suggestion effect is executed, and the entertainment of the game can be enhanced. Note that the present invention is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and for example, only when suggesting a change to a specific display mode, a suggestion effect that does not have a common mode may be executed.

  Next, an effect that the shining blue sphere 18e thrown by the character A collides with the active display is performed, and it is found that the suggestion effect is a true suggestion effect (FIG. 76 (a3)). Then, an active display change effect in which the active display changes to the first display mode (blue) is performed (FIG. 76 (a4)).

  In FIGS. 76 (b1) to (b4), the suggestion effect (false suggestion effect) of the second mode that suggests that the active display changes from the normal mode (white) to the first display mode (blue) is executed. An example is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (b1), when the variable display is started, the active display is displayed on the active display portion 18d (the active display in the normal state is displayed in FIG. 76 (b1)). Here, at the first timing, a character B (in FIG. 76 (b2) having a blue sphere 18e (simply displayed as “blue” in FIG. 76 (b2)) held on the square head “ The suggestion effect in which 18g appears (shown as “B”) is executed (FIG. 76 (b2)).

  In the example shown in FIG. 76 (b2), it is suggested that the active display changes to the first display mode (blue) when the sphere held by the character is a sphere 18e that shines in blue. In addition, when the suggestion effect is executed in the second mode in which the character B appears, the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes is larger than when the suggestion effect is executed in the first mode in which the character A appears. It is suggested that the ratio is low (that is, the ratio of true suggestion is low).

  Next, an effect that the shining blue ball 18e thrown by the character B passes the upper side of the active display is performed, so that the suggestion effect is found to be a false suggestion effect (FIG. 76 (b3)). At this time, the display mode of the active display does not change (FIG. 76 (b4)).

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the specific display means that can display the specific display (active display in this example) corresponding to the variable display being executed, and the display mode of the specific display are the first. Aspect (in this example, the second display aspect (green) or the third display aspect (red)) and a second aspect (in this example, the first display that is controlled to be in an advantageous state than the first aspect) Change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect (in this example, an active display change effect) to be changed to any one of a plurality of display modes including a mode (blue)), and a first timing during variable display ( In this example, after the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 70, the first timing before the start of super reach and the second timing after the first timing (in this example, after the start of super reach shown in FIG. 70, before the stop of fluctuation). In the second timing) The suggestion effect execution means that can execute the suggestion effect (in this example, the suggestion effect) that suggests that the display mode of the display changes, and at the second timing, it is suggested that the display mode of the specific display changes to the second mode. Suggesting effect restricting means for restricting execution of the suggesting effect (in this example, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), a true suggesting effect suggesting that the first display mode (blue) is changed at the second timing. Is not determined as the change pattern 2-3 to be executed, and as shown in FIG. 72A, the change pattern 2-1 changes to the first display mode (blue) at the second timing. Execution of the suggesting false suggestion effect is prohibited). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being awakened by suggesting that there is a low possibility of a big hit at a timing when the expectation for the big hit is increasing.

  In this embodiment, the change suggestion pattern 2-3 is not determined as a change suggestion pattern 2-3 in which a true suggestion effect suggesting a change to the first display mode (blue) is performed at the second timing. In 1, the active display changes to the first display mode (blue) at the second timing by prohibiting the execution of the false suggestion effect that suggests the change to the first display mode (blue) at the second timing. Although the execution of the suggestive effect suggesting that is restricted, the restriction method is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the second timing is limited by lowering the execution frequency of the suggestive effect that suggests that the active display changes to the first display mode (blue) as compared to the first timing (that is, allowing a certain level). May be. In this case, at a second timing, it is allowed to execute the active display change effect for changing the active display to the first display mode (blue) to some extent.

  In addition, for example, as shown in FIGS. 72A and 72B, a change determined so that the active display does not change to the first display mode (blue) at the second timing and does not suggest such an indication. Instead of using the pattern determination table, after determining by lottery whether or not there is a change in the active display at each timing, and the contents of the change, and whether or not there is a false suggestion effect, the first display mode ( In the case where the prohibition of suggesting a change to (blue) is satisfied, the restriction may be performed by executing a process for performing a re-lottery process, a process for canceling execution, a process for replacing with another effect, or the like.

  In addition, in this embodiment, after the variable display is started, a specific effect (in this example, super reach) can be executed to notify whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit gaming state). Specific production execution means. Then, the second timing is configured to arrive in a period in which the specific effect is being executed (in this example, the second timing after the start of super reach shown in FIG. 70 and before the change stop). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the possibility of a big hit during execution of the specific effect from being suggested, and it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the specific effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, the suggestion effect execution means has a display mode (in this example, the second display) in which the display level of the specific display is controlled to be more advantageous than the second mode at the second timing. It is configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect that suggests changing to a mode (green) or a third display mode (red). Therefore, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the suggestion effect executed at the second timing.

  Further, in this embodiment, the suggestion effect execution means is a plurality of effect modes with different degrees of expectation (in this example, the ratio of the active display display mode after the effect change (that is, the true suggest effect) and the jackpot expectation It is comprised so that the suggestion effect of the 1st aspect and 2nd aspect from which a degree differs can be performed (refer FIG.72 (D)). Therefore, it is possible to focus attention on the direction of the suggestion effect and improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in this embodiment, the suggestion effect execution means includes a first suggestion effect (a true suggestion effect in this example) in which the display mode of the specific display changes after the effect, and a display mode in which the display mode of the specific display does not change after the effect. 2 suggestion effects (false suggestion effects in this example) can be executed, and the second timing has a higher ratio of executing the first suggestion effects than the first timing (in this example, FIG. 72 (C ), The ratio of executing the false suggestion effect is higher at the first timing than the second timing, that is, the rate of executing the true suggestion effect at the second timing than the first timing. Is high). Therefore, attention can be paid to the suggestion effect executed at the second timing.

  Further, in this embodiment, the suggestion effect execution means executes the suggestion effect according to an aspect that is at least partially in common, regardless of which display aspect of the plurality of display aspects is suggested. (In this example, even when suggesting which display mode the active display changes to, the first mode in which the character A appears or the second mode in which the character B appears is executed. (See FIG. 76). Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize the suggestion effect.

  Similar to the active display, the normal display mode and the first to third display modes may be provided as the display mode of the hold display, and the display mode of the active display may be inherited from the display mode of the hold display. In this case, when the start winning is generated, the final display mode of the active display and the display mode change from the display as the hold display to the end of the variable display after the display as the active display. It is also possible to determine a change pattern indicating the above. Further, for example, when a start winning occurs, the final display mode and change pattern of the hold display may be determined, and when the change starts, the final display mode and change pattern of the active display may be determined. .

[Third Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the third embodiment (third embodiment) will be described. In this embodiment, the detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the second embodiment will be omitted, and the parts different from those of the second embodiment will be mainly described.

  In this embodiment, in the effect symbol variation start process, if the variation pattern includes a pseudo-ream, a pseudo-ream effect setting process is performed.

  In the quasi-continuous effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines a quasi-continuous effect pattern corresponding to the aspect of the effect operation in the quasi-continuous effect. At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (A), it may be determined as any one of the pseudo-continuous effect patterns in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance at a determination ratio corresponding to the presence / absence of the big hit determination.

  In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 77A, the determination ratio of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern varies depending on whether or not the big hit determination is made. More specifically, when the big hit determination is not notified, the determination ratio of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEA is the highest, whereas when the big hit determination is notified, the determination ratio of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEB is the highest. . When the big hit determination is not notified, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEC is not determined. On the other hand, when the big hit determination is notified, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEC may be determined.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines a temporary stop symbol based on the determined pseudo-continuous effect pattern, and ends the pseudo-continuous effect setting process.

  After executing the pseudo-continuous effect setting process in the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 120 executes the active display change effect setting process.

  In the active display change effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not there is an active display change effect. At this time, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), it may be determined at a determination ratio according to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern.

  In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 77 (B), the determination ratio for determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect differs according to the pseudo continuous effect pattern. More specifically, in the case of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEB, each determination result has a determined value so that it is determined to execute the active display change effect at a higher rate than in the case of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEA. Assigned. As described above, in the determination process of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern, when the big hit determination is not notified, the determination ratio of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEA is the highest, while when the big hit determination is notified, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern is determined. The determination ratio of the production pattern GEB is the highest. With such a setting, when the active display change effect is executed, the possibility of being a “big hit” is higher than when the active display change effect is not executed, and the player's expectation for being controlled to the big hit gaming state is increased. it can.

  Further, in the case of the pseudo continuous effect pattern GEC, each determination result is determined so that it is determined to execute the active display change effect at a higher rate than in the case of the pseudo continuous effect pattern GEA and the pseudo continuous effect pattern GEB. A value has been assigned. As described above, when the big hit determination is not notified, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEC is not determined, whereas when the big hit determination is notified, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEC is determined. is there. With such a setting, when the active display change effect is executed, the possibility of being a “big hit” is higher than when the active display change effect is not executed, and the player's expectation for being controlled to the big hit gaming state is increased. it can.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the determination ratio setting example shown in FIG. 77 (B), and any setting that increases the possibility of a “big hit” when the active display change effect is executed, compared to when it is not executed. I just need it.

  Next, when executing the active display change effect, the execution timing is determined. At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (C), if it is determined at any one of the timings at which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance at a determination ratio corresponding to the combination of the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations and the pseudo continuous effect pattern. Good. When the execution timing of the active display change effect is determined, the active display change effect setting process ends.

  In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 77 (C), the determination ratio of the execution timing of the active display change effect differs depending on the combination of the pseudo continuous variation count and the pseudo continuous effect pattern. More specifically, in the case of the pseudo continuous effect pattern GEA when the number of times of pseudo continuous change is 1, the determination ratio at which the execution timing of the active display change effect is in the initial change is the highest, while the pseudo continuous effect is In the case of the pattern GEB, the determination ratio at which the execution timing of the active display change effect is in the first fluctuation is the same as the determination ratio in the first revariable display. In the case of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEC, the active display change effect is the same. The determination ratio at which the execution timing is during the first re-variable display becomes the highest. Further, when the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is 2, in the case of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEA, the determination rate that the execution timing of the active display change effect is in the first fluctuation is the highest, while in the case of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEB In the case of the pseudo display effect pattern GEC, the execution timing of the active display change effect is the second time when the active display change effect is executed. The decision ratio becomes the highest. Further, when the number of times of pseudo-continuous variation is 3, in the case of pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEA, the execution ratio of the active display change effect is highest during the first variation, while in the case of pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEB In the case of the pseudo display effect pattern GEC, the execution timing of the active display change effect is the third revariable display. The decision ratio becomes the highest. Further, as described above, in the determination process of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern, when the big hit determination is not notified, the determination ratio of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEA is the highest, while when the big hit determination is notified, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern is determined. The determination ratio of the production pattern GEB is the highest. Further, when the big hit determination is not notified, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEC is not determined. On the other hand, when the big hit determination is notified, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEC may be determined. With such a setting, when the execution timing of the active display change effect is late, there is a higher possibility of a big hit than when it is early, and the player's expectation that the game will be controlled to the big hit gaming state Can be increased.

  In addition, the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 77 (C) is not limited, and an arbitrary setting that can change the execution timing of the active display change effect according to the combination of the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations and the pseudo-continuous effect pattern. If it is. In addition, it is good also as arbitrary settings which can vary the execution timing of an active display change effect according to either a pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation frequency or a pseudo | simulation continuous effect pattern.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a predetermined variable display (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) that executes variable display a predetermined number of times from the start of variable display until the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. The specific display is different in the timing at which the display mode changes depending on the type of the predetermined variable display (for example, the pseudo display where the execution timing of the active display change effect is determined according to whether or not the big hit determination is made) It is determined at a determination ratio according to the production pattern (see FIGS. 77A and 77C). Therefore, the production can be diversified and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, about the structure shown in said 3rd Embodiment, only a part of structure may be applied to the game machine shown in 2nd Embodiment, or all structures are 2nd implementation. You may apply to the game machine shown with the form of. Further, the configuration shown in the second embodiment and the configuration shown in the third embodiment may be combined and applied to a gaming machine. For example, in the configuration shown in the third embodiment, the suggestion effect can be executed in addition to the active display change effect, and as the timing comes later (for example, during the third revariable display> second revariable display) Medium> in order of the first re-variable display), the execution of the suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode is changed to a low display mode and the active display change effect changing to the display mode having a low level of expectation is restricted. May be.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the effect control board 12, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 5 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  A configuration example combining the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, or the combination of the first embodiment and the third embodiment will be described. The structural example which combined 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment or 1st Embodiment and 3rd Embodiment is as follows, for example.

  A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) that performs variable display (for example, variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the production symbol) and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player 1) movable bodies (for example, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402) provided so as to be movable, and movement areas (for example, the movement area E1 and the movement area E2) of the movable bodies. A predetermined light guide pattern (for example, a light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 incident on the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emits the light from the front surface) overlapping with at least a part of the player in the depth direction And a specific display means (for example, an active display unit) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, active display) corresponding to the variable display being executed. 8d) and the display mode of the specific display is lower than the first mode (for example, the second display mode (green) or the third display mode (red)) and the expectation level controlled to the advantageous state is lower than the first mode. A change effect execution means (for example, an active display change effect) that can be changed to any one of a plurality of display modes including the second mode (for example, the first display mode (blue)) (for example, The portion in which the production control microcomputer 115 executes steps S8006 and S8105), the first timing during variable display (for example, the first timing after the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 70 and before the start of super reach), and the first timing. This suggests that the display mode of the specific display changes at a later second timing (for example, the second timing after the start of super reach shown in FIG. 70 and before the fluctuation stop). At the second timing, the display mode of the specific display changes to the second mode at the second timing when the suggestion mode execution means (for example, the stage where the performance control microcomputer 115 executes step S8006 or S8105) capable of executing the suggestion stage. Suggestion effect restricting means for restricting execution of the suggestion effect suggesting that (for example, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), the true suggestion suggesting that the first display mode (blue) is changed at the second timing. As shown in FIG. 72 (A), the change pattern 2-1 is changed to the first display mode (blue) at the second timing while not changing to the change pattern 2-3 in which the effect is executed. For example, and the movement period of the movable body (for example, Ta2 at the start of the advancement operation to Ta at the end of the advancement operation) (E.g., the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402) can be executed in at least a part of the period up to 3 to emit the predetermined light guide pattern of the light guide section. It is possible to execute a light emission effect in which the predetermined light guide pattern of the light guide plate 501 emits light during at least a part of the moving period. 23 (A), FIG. 27, and FIG. 28).

  According to the gaming machine of this configuration example, when the light guide unit that forms the light guide pattern that overlaps the moving region of the movable body emits light, the light guide unit has a predetermined period during at least a part of the moving period of the movable body. It is possible to execute a light emission effect that causes the light guide pattern to emit light. For this reason, when the movable body moves, the movement of the movable body becomes difficult to visually recognize by executing the light emission effect. As a result, it is difficult for the player to recognize the movement of the movable body, so that the effect can be improved. Moreover, in performing the suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the specific display changes, the execution of the suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the specific display changes to the second mode is limited at the second timing. Yes. Although the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state increases, if the specific display changes at the second timing after the first timing, the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state further increases. Here, if the change in the specific display at the second timing is a change to the second mode in which the degree of expectation that is controlled to the advantageous state is low, the degree of expectation that is controlled to the advantageous state is not increased, resulting in a decrease in interest There are concerns that lead to it. In this regard, in the gaming machine of this configuration example, at the second timing, execution of a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the specific display changes to the second mode is restricted. For this reason, since the suggestion to the 2nd aspect in 2nd timing decreases, it can suppress that the expectation degree controlled to an advantageous state becomes a low state, Therefore It can prevent that the interest of a game falls.

  Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration example, the suggestion effect may be an effect accompanied by the movement of the movable body. In this example, since the player can make the movement of the movable body when performing the suggestion effect more visible, it is possible to improve the effect and to suppress the decrease in interest. At this time, the display mode of the specific display may be suggested based on the light guide pattern when the movable body moves. For example, when a color change occurs as the display mode of the specific display, the color of the display mode of the specific display may be suggested by the color emitted by the light guide pattern.

  In the gaming machine having the above configuration example, the specific display may be hidden by the movable body when the movable body is located in any of the movable ranges. In this example, when the display mode of the specific display is changed, the specific display may be changed when the specific display is hidden by the moved movable body. In this example, when the specific display once hidden by the movable body becomes visible again, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of whether or not the specific display has changed, which contributes to the enhancement of interest. be able to.

  In the gaming machine having the above configuration example, the specific display may be displayed on the movable body. In this case, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like as a display device may be attached to the movable body so that the display device can be moved and a specific display is displayed on the display device. Further, when the specific display is displayed on the movable body, the display of the specific display may be made invisible by passing behind the predetermined obstacle while the movable body is moving. In this case, the specific display may be changed when the specific display displayed on the movable body is hidden. In this example, when the specific display once hidden by the obstacle becomes visible again, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of whether or not the specific display has changed, thus contributing to the improvement of interest. be able to.

  As described above, the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings. However, specific configurations are not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions without departing from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. It is.

  For example, in each of the above-described embodiments, the game control microcomputer 100 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 115. However, the game control microcomputer 100 may be connected to another board (for example, FIG. Or a sound / lamp board having a function of a circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and a function of a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). An effect control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 115 on the effect control board 12 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 5. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 115 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 100 in each of the above-described embodiments. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the driver board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the change is started in order to notify the change control pattern 115 indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, etc. to the effect control microcomputer 115. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted has been described, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 115 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 100 uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-continuity, whether there is a slip effect, etc. before reaching reach (so-called if not reach). A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach is not reach, so-called first) You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 115 may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 115 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, “the ratio is different” is not limited to those having different ratios such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. , A: B = 100%: This is a concept that includes those with different ratios (that is, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols such as “1” to “9”, production symbols, and normal symbols are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed is shown. It is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking one kind of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  Also, in each of the above embodiments, there is a gaming machine that is controlled to a probable state after the big hit game based on the fact that there are a probable big hit and a normal big hit as the big hit type, and that the big hit type is determined to be a promiscuous big hit. However, it is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball apparatus in which a predetermined probability changing area is provided (a certain variable winning ball apparatus may be provided in a single special variable winning ball apparatus, or a plurality of special variable winning balls may be provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game. The configuration described in each of the above embodiments can be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a certain change state after the completion.

  Further, in the embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a predetermined number of gaming balls are inside the gaming machine. The number of loaned balls that are enclosed in a circulating manner and lent in response to a loan request by a player and the number of prize balls that are awarded in response to winnings are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to so-called enclosed game machines that are stored in the memory. In these enclosed game machines, not the game ball but points and points are given to the player, so these points and points assigned correspond to the game value.

  In the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is applied as an example of the game medium. However, the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. For example, a non-spherical game medium such as a medal is used. It may be.

  In the embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of a gaming machine. However, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a gaming value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving a variation display result to a variation display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified, and a prize is awarded according to the variation display result derived to the variation display device. This can also be applied to a slot machine that can generate

  In addition, about each structure shown in said 1st-3rd embodiment, even if it applies only the one part structure to the game machine shown in other embodiment among the 1st-3rd embodiment. All the configurations may be applied to the gaming machines shown in the other embodiments of the first to third embodiments.

1 Pachinko machine 5 Production display device 103 CPU
120 CPU for effect control
302L, 302R first movable body 307L, 307R movable body LED
402 2nd movable body 407A-407D Movable body LED
500 Light guide plate device 501 Light guide plate 502 Light guide plate LED
506 Light-emitting area 507 Non-light-emitting area 507A to 507F Non-light-emitting part E Mechanism parts E1, E2 Moving area

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
A movable body provided movably,
A light guide portion that forms a predetermined light guide pattern on the player side in the depth direction, overlapping at least a part of the moving region of the movable body;
A specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display being executed;
It is possible to execute a change effect in which the display mode of the specific display is changed to any one of a plurality of display modes including the first mode and the second mode that is controlled to be in the above-mentioned advantageous state than the first mode. Change execution execution means,
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the specific display changes at a first timing during variable display and a second timing after the first timing;
Suggestion restricting means for restricting execution of the suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the specific display changes to the second mode at the second timing,
A gaming machine, wherein a light-emitting effect in which the predetermined light guide pattern of the light guide part emits light can be executed during at least a part of the moving period of the movable body.

Images